Skip to main content

We will keep fighting for all libraries - stand with us!

Full text of "DTIC AD0828283: DESIGN STUDY OF HEAVY LIFT HELICOPTER EXTERNAL LOAD HANDLING SYSTEM"

See other formats


UNCLASSIFIED 


_ AD NUMBER _ 

AD828283 

LIMITATION CHANGES 
TO: 

Approved for public release; distribution is 
unlimited. 


FROM: 

Distribution authorized to U.S. Gov't, agencies 
and their contractors; 

Administrative/Operational Use; NOV 1967. Other 
requests shall be referred to Army Aviation 
Materiel Labs ., Fort Eustis, VA. 


_ AUTHORITY 

USAAVLABS ltr 14 Jul 1979 


THIS PAGE IS UNCLASSIFIED 













\1 

USAAVLABS TECHNICAL REPORT 67-46 


DESIGN STUDY OF 
HEAVY LIFT HELICOPTER 
EXTERNAL LOAD HANDLING SYSTEM 


ir 

Lester R. Burroughs 
Harold E. Ralston 


D D C 

Ifr- ■ . . T; 

mi 3 mi 

ag&gilj'x~ 


November 1967 

U. S. ARMY AVIATION MATERIEL LABORATORIES 
FORT EUSTIS, VIRGINIA 

CONTRACT DA 44-177-AMC-467(T) 

# SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT 

DIVISION OF UNITED AIRCRAFT CORPORATION 
STRATFORD, CONNECTICUT 

* 

This document is subject to special 
export controls and each transmittal 
til foreign governments or foreign 
nationals may be made only u ith 
prior approval of i'S Army Aviation 
Materiel Laboratories, Fort F.ustis, 

I irginia 23604. 





Disclaimer s 


The findings in this report are not to be construed as an official Depart¬ 
ment of the Army position unless so designated by other authorized 
documents. 

When Government drawings, specifications, or other data are used for 
any purpose other than in connection with a definitely related Government 
procurement operation, the United States Government thereby incurs no 
responsibility nor any obligation whatsoever; and the fact that the Govern¬ 
ment may have formulated, furnished, or in any way supplied the said 
drawings, specifications, or other data is not to be regarded by implica¬ 
tion or otherwise as in any manner licensing the holder or any other per¬ 
son or corporation, or conveying any rights or permission, to manufac¬ 
ture, use, or sell any patented invention that may in any way be related 
thereto. 

Trade names cited in this report do not constitute an official endorsement 
or approval of the use of such commercial hardware or software. 


Disposition Instructions 

Destroy this report when no longer needed. Do not return it to the 
originator. 








DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

U 5 ARMY AVIATION MATERIEL LABORATORIES 
FORT EUSTIS. VIRGINIA 23604 


The basis for this design study was obtained from previous investi¬ 
gations of problems associated with the mechanics of cargo handling 
by aerial-crane-type aircraft (USAAVIABS Technical Report 66-63). 

This report is one of three contract studies of the same problem 
with varying technical approaches. The conclusions drawn by this 
contractor are based on sound analytical techniques. They are partic¬ 
ularly appropriate to a single-rotor, aerial-crane-type configuration. 
In this context, this command concurs in general with these findings. 
The preliminary designs developed by the contractor are complete, 
accurate, and in sufficient detail to provide a basis for component 
development programs. 

Future work anticipated by this activity relative to this area 
includes an analysis of the three preliminary contract designs so 
as to define an optimum system based on the best features of each. 

This may be followed by conponent development and test of critical 
items as appropriate and the detail design, fabrication, and test of 
an experimental system. 



Task 1X130901D332 
Contract DA 44-177-AMC-467(T) 
USAAVLABS Technical Report 67-46 
November 1967 



DESIGN STUDY OF 
HEAVY LIFT HELICOPTER 
EXTERNAL LOAD HANDLING SYSTEM 

Sikorsky Engineering Report 30441 

By 

Lester R. Burroughs 
and 

Harold E. Ralaten 


Prepared by 
Sikorsky Aircraft 

Division of United Aircraft Corporation 
Stratford, Connecticut 


for 



U. S. ARMY AVIATION MATERIEL LABORATORIES 
FORT EUSTIS, VIRGINIA 


*v 

■tsji 




This document Is subject to special export controls and 
each transmittal to foreign governments or foreign 
nationals may be made only with prior approval of US Army 
Aviation Materiel Laboratories, Fort Eustls, Virginia 23604. 






This report presents the results of a two-phase feasibility and prelimi¬ 
nary design study of load suspension configurations capable of meeting the 
external cargo handling system requirements of a 40,000-pound-payload 
heavy lift helicopter. 

In Phase I, Design Analysis, both separate function configurations (those 
that incorporate individual single- and multi-point hoists) and combined 
function configurations (multi-point hoists used to perform both single- 
and multi-point missions) have been investigated for two external load 
handling system arrangements: single- plus two-point suspension and 
single- plus four-point load suspension* 

This phase was primarily concerned with the investigation of hoxst types; 
the methods of power transmission (to the hoists); and the selection of 
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical components. A comparative evalua¬ 
tion of 13 system arrangements was made on the basis of weight, power, re¬ 
liability, in-flight safety, versatility, and productivity. 

The single- plus two-point and single- plus four-point systems deter¬ 
mined to meet the heavy lift requirement best were presented to USAAVLABS, 
and the latter system was recommended for the Phase II, Preliminary Design. 

Upon receipt of approval, the preliminary design of a load suspension sy¬ 
stem incorporating a mechanically driven single-point hoist and four hy¬ 
draulically driven multi-point hoists was initiated. This phase of the 
study included the preparation of preliminary (layouts) drawings, load and 
stress analysis of all major components, and a maintainability and relia¬ 
bility analysis, as well as the preparation of a component development 
plan. 

The single- plus four-point system described herein weighs 4974 pounds for 
a capacity of 40,000 pounds. The system has been designed such that the 
hoists of both systems are readily removable when missions requiring mini¬ 
mum empty weight are to be undertaken. For single-point operation only 
(four-point hoists removed), the system weighs 2738 pounds; for four-point 
missions (single-point hoist removed) the system weighs 2704 pounds* 

Both single- plus four-point systems have potential for growth to 50,000 
pounds with a minimum of modification. This increased capacity can be 
realized for a total weight increase of 270 pounds for both systems. 

A typical sequence of operations for both single- and four-point systems 
is outlined in Appendix IV, 




FOREWORD 


This report covers a two-phase evaluation of external cargo handling sy¬ 
stems for a 40,OOO-pound-payload heavy lift helicopter. This project was 
conducted during the 10-month period from July 1, 1966, through April 28, 
1967, for the U.S. Anqy Aviation Materiel Laboratories (USAAVLABS) vnder 
Contract DA 44-177-AMC-467(T). Pertinent data upon which portions of thin 
study were based were provided by the following: Bergen Wire Rope Company; 
The lyconing Division of AVCO; Eastern Rotorcraft Corporation; Vickers 
Incorporated, Division of Sperry Rand Corporation; Taylor Devices, Incor¬ 
porated; end Holex, Incorporated. 

USAAVLABS technical direction was provided by Mr. J. Vichness, Chief, Air 
Cargo Systems Branch. 

The principal investigators for Sikorsky Aircraft were L. R. Burroughs, 
Assistant Supervisor, Mechanical Design and Development Section, and H. E. 
Ralston, Supervisor, Mechanical Accessories Group. Also making signifi¬ 
cant contributions to this effort were A. Korzun, Design Engineer, J. Kish, 
Senior Design Analyst of the Mechanical Design Section, and R. Fidler, 
Design Analyst of the Hydraulics Section. 



TABLE 07 CONTENTS 


l 

I 

f 

r 


Page 




SUMMAHT 

ill 

FOREWORD 

V 

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 

X 

LIST OF TABLES 

xiv 

LIST OF SIMBOLS 

xvl 

INTRODUCTION 

1 

PHASE I - DESIGN ANALYSIS 

2 

DISCUSSION 

2 

BASIC DATA 

3 

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

3 

MISSION RBQUIREMBIT8 

3 

AIRCRAFT DESCRIPTION 

4 

INVESTIGATION OF VEHICLES 

9 

HOIST SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS DESIGN 

12 

HOIST LOCATION AND TYPE 

12 

HOIST DESIGN 

22 

POWBt SOURCES 

39 

CLUTCH-REVHtSER UNIT 

42 

CONTROL SYSTEMS 

42 

ISOLATORS 

49 

HOIST CABLES 

49 

CARGO HOOKS 

50 

MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS 

54 

HOIST SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 

60 

LOAD ACQUISITION AND RELEASE 

91 

SINGLE-POINT MODE 

91 

TWO-POINT MODE 

91 

FOUR-POINT MODE 

94 

AIRCRAFT-LOAD INTHtACTION 

96 

STABILITY OF SLUNG LOADS 

96 

CENTBl-OF-GRAVITI SHIFT 

99 

TOWING CAPABILITY 

99 

AIRCRAFT CONTROLLABILITY 

101 

VffiTICAL OSCILLATION 

107 

POD JETTISON 

107 


▼li 


I 


wuTMti 



IN-FLIGHT ADJUSTMENT OF MULTI-POINT HOISTS 


111 


PROBLEM AREAS AND PROPOSED SOLUTIONS 
MECHANICAL LOAD RELEASE FROM COCKPIT 
WEIGHT 

SYNCHRONIZATION OF KULfI-POINT HOISTS 


113 

113 

114 

115 


COMPARATIVE RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY ANALYSIS 116 


EVALUATION PROCEDURES 
INTRODUCTION 
DISCUSSION 
DESIGN OBJECTIVES 
QUALITATIVE EVALUATION 
SUMMARY 


118 

118 

118 

120 

127 

131 


PHASE II - PRELIMINARY DESIGN 134 

DISCUSSION 134 

SINGLE-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 136 

HOIST 136 

CLUTCH-REVERSES UNIT 137 

CABLE 139 

MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS 140 

CONTROLS AND INDICATOR SYSTEM 141 


FOUR-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 143 

HOIST 143 

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 144 

ERROR ANALYSIS 148 

niRT.it 149 

MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS 151 

CONTROLS AND INDICATOR SYSTEM 153 


LOAD AND STRESS ANALYSIS 157 

INTRODUCTION 157 

DESIGN CRITERIA 157 

SINGLE-POINT HOIST 159 

SINGLE-POINT HOIST DRIVE SYSTEM 191 

FOUR-POINT HOIST 197 


WEIGHT ANALYSIS 

MAINTAINABILITY AID RELIABILITY 
INTRODUCTION 

P1CT.TAR TT.TTT AND MAINTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS 


FAILURE MODE AND EFFECT ANALYSIS 218 
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 218 
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 220 

GROWTH POTENTIAL 225 


215 

218 

218 


* 


vlll 




SINGIE-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 225 

FOUR-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 226 

COMPONENT AND SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT PLAN 228 

DISCUSSION 228 

TEST PROGRAM 228 

ESTIMATED DEVELOPMENT COSTS 230 

SCHHjULE 231 

CONCLUSIONS 232 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 234 

APPENDIXES 

I SURVEY OF MILITARY VEHICLES 236 

II MECHANICAL VARIABLE SPED) DRIVE 245 

III CARGO HANDLING SYSTEM DRAWINGS 251 

IV TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 267 


DISTRIBUTION 


271 



ILLUSTRATIONS 


Fluor* Pjgg 


1 

Single-Rotor H.L.H. 

5 

2 

Tandem-Rotor H.L.H. 

7 

3 

Four-Paint Hoist Load Attachment 

Point Spaco Envelope 

13 

4 

Conventional Design - Single-Point Hoist 

15 

5 

Two-Part, Double-Reeved Hoist 

19 

6 

Zero-Moment Hoist 

23 

7 

General Gear Arrangement - One Spur and 

Three Planetary 

33 

8 

General Gear Arrangement - Two Spur and 

Two Planetary 

34 

9 

General Gear Arrangement - Compound Planetary 

35 

10 

General Arrangement - Conventional and 

Compound Planetary 

36 

11 

Hydraulic Schematic - Single- Plus Two-Point 

Suepension 

44 

12 

Multi-Point Hoist - Equalized Load System, 

Cargo Attitude vs C.G. Location 

46 

13 

Hydraulic Schematic - Single- Plus Four-Point 
Suspension 

48 

14 

CH-54A Book - Swivel Assembly 

51 

15 

Traction Sheave 

55 

16 

Conductor Reel 

57 

17 

-1 Configuration 

61 

18 

-2 Configuration 

63 

19 

-3 Configuration 

65 

20 

-4 Configuration 

67 


x 



t: 

I 

f 

i 


l 

\ 


i 




t 


t 


0 


I 

i 

i 



Figure 


Page 

21 

-5 Configuration 

69 

22 

-6 Configuration 

71 

23 

-7 Configuration 

73 

24 

-11 Configuration 

75 

25 

-13 Configuration 

77 

26 

-14 Configuration 

79 

27 

-15 Configuration 

81 

28 

-17 Configuration 

83 

29 

-18 Configuration 

85 

30 

Special Tow Gear - H.L.H. 

92 

31 

Restoring Moment for Two- and Four-Point 
Suspension with 25,000-Pound Load 

97 

32 

Typical Yaw Divergence of 25,000-Pound 

Helicopter Fuselage 

98 

33 

Low-Speed Towing Characteristics 

(Gross Weight 38.000 Pounds, C.G. at Sta. 550, 

Zero Skew Angle) 

100 

34 

Trim Characteristics vs Gross Weight - 
Single Rotor 

102 

35 

Vertical Response to Release of 

Self-Propelled Mortar in Hover 

103 

36 

Vertical Response to Release of 

Self-Propelled Mortar at 60 Knots 

104 

37 

Pitch Response to Release of 5-Ton 

Wrecker in Hover 

105 

38 

Pitch Response to Release of 5-Ton 

Wrecker at 60 Knots 

106 

39 

Vertical Bounce Mode Frequencies vs 

Cable Length Without Decoupler 

108 

40 

Decoupler Spring Rate vs Load 

109 



k 



7 





Xl 



F£gurs 


Page 

41 

Vertical Bounce Mode Frequencies tb 

Cable Length With Decoupler 

no 

42 

H.L.H. Fuselage Mathematical Model 

112 

43 

Clutch-Reverser Unit Operation 

138 

44 

Four-Point Hoist Attitude at Cable 

Extremes 

143 

45 

Hydroelectrical Feedback System, 

Four-Point Hoist 

146 

46 

Difference in Cable Length vs Cable 

Travel, Four-Point Hoist System 

150 

47 

Controls and Indicators, Single- and 

Four-Point Hoists 

155 

48 

Gearing Schematic, Single-Point Hoist 

160 

49 

Center-of-Gravity Shift Due to Hoist Load at 
Maximum Limits of Cable 

161 

50 

Drum and Support Structures, 

Single-Point Hoist 

162 

51 

Load Isolator and Support Structure, 

Single-Point Hoist 

163 

52 

Input Housing, Single-Point Hoist 

165 

53 

Drum and Support Housing, 

Single-Point Hoist 

166 

54 

Mounting Arrangement, Single-Point Hoist 

168 

55 

Critical Section, Level Wind Mechanism, 
Single-Point Hoist 

170 

56 

Bellaouth, Scrub Roller, and Ball Screw 

Assembly; Single-Point Hoist 

174 

57 

Belleville Washers, Free Reeling Clutch, 
Single-Point Hoist 

179 

58 

Free Falling of Load, Single-Point Hoist 

181 

59 

Load vs Free Fall Velocity, 

Single-Point Hoist 

183 


xli 





Page 

60 

Major Structural Members, 

Four-Point Hoist 

198 

61 

Side Plate, Four-Point Hoist 

199 

62 

Induced Axial Loads in Level Wind 

Ball Screw, Four-Point Hoist 

200 

63 

Load vs Free Fall Velocity 

Four-Point Hoist 

206 

64 

Reliability Block Diagraa of 

Cable Cutter Systen 

219 

65 

Typical Military Vehicle 

238 

66 

Variable Speed Drive 

247 

67 

Output Parer and Torque vs Output 

Speed, Variable Speed Drive 

249 

68 

Single-Point Hoist Installation, 

Single-Rotor H.L.H. 

251 

69 

Four-Point Hoist Installation, 

Single-Rotor H.L.H. 

253 

70 

Single- Plus Four-Point Hoist 

Installation, TandesnRotor H.L.H. 

255 

71 

Single-Point Hoist 

257 

72 

Clutch-Re verser Unit and Angle Gearboxes 

259 

73 

Four-Point Hoist 

261 

74 

Cargo Hook, 12,000-Pound Capacity 

263 

75 

Isolator, Four-Point Hoist 

265 



xlll 










TABLES 


T»bl« Page 


I 

Basic Design Data 

3 

II 

U.S. kray Vehicles - Length and Width 

Dimensions, 15,000- to 40,000-pound Class 

9 

III 

U.S. Army Vehicles with Heights of 130 Inches 
or More, 15,000- to 40,000-Pound Class 

10 

IV 

topical U.S. knay Vehicles 

10 

V 

Hoist Location - Single-Rotor Aircraft 

14 

VI 

Hoist Location - Tandem-Rotor Aircraft 

18 

VII 

Drum Material Mechanical Properties 

28 

VIII 

Drum Thickness Summary, Single Cable 

Layer Designs 

30 

IX 

Drum Thickness Sumnaxy, Multiple Cable 

Layer Design 

32 

X 

Hoist Gear Ratios 

32 

XI 

Sumnaxy of Single-Point Cargo Hoists 

37 

XII 

Sumnaxy of Multi-Point Hoists 

38 

XIII 

Hydraulic Pump Summary 

39 

XIV 

Hydraulic Motor Summary 

40 

XV 

Helicopter Cargo Hooks 

52 

XVI 

Basic Data - Cargo Hooks 

53 

XVII 

Single-Point Plus Four-Point Load 

Suspension Configurations 

87 

XVIII 

Single-Point Plus Two-Point Load 

Suspension Configuratioxis 

89 

XIX 

Estimated Parasite Drag 

Id 

xx 

Reliability/Maintainability Conparison, 

H.L.H. External Cargo Handling Systems 

117 


xiv 



V 

\ 

? 

i' 

Table 


\ 

i 

r> 

‘ji 

j 

Page 


in 

Summary, Productivity Analysis 

129 i 

mi 

Heavy Lift Helicopter Qualitative 

Evaluation Matrix 

330 

« 

mn 

Major Support Structure Bearing Reactions at 

P " 150,000 Pounds, Single-Point Hoist 

164 


in? 

Gear Sumnary - Single-Point Hoist 

186 


XXV 

Sunniary of Bearing Lives and Loads - 
Single-Point Hoist 

188 


XXVI 

Stannary of Bearing Lives and Loads - 
Single-Point Hoist 

189 


XXVII 

Critical Section Shaft Stresses - 
Single-Point Hoist 

190 


XXVIII 

Sumnary of Gear Tooth Bending and 

Compressive Stresses - Clutch-Re vereer Unit 

193 


xnx 

Summary of Bearing Loads and Lives - 
Clutch-Revereer Unit 

194 


xxx 

Bearing Lives and Loads - 
Upper Angle Gearbox 

195 


xra 

Bearing Lives and Loads - 
Lower Angle Gearbox 

196 

► 

nm 

Gear Summary - Four-Point Hoist 

208 


XXXIII 

Critical Section Shaft Stresses - 
Four-Point Hoist 

212 


anv 

Summary of Bearing Lives and Loads - 
Four-Point Hoist 

233 

* 

XXXV 

Weight Sumnary - 40,000-Pound 

External Cargo Handling System 

216 

... 

XXXVI 

Reliability and Maintainability 

Characteristics 

220 

1 

XXXVII 

Failure Mode and Effect Analysis 

222 

| 

XXXVIII 

List of Military Vehicles 

238 

1 

XXXIX 

Design Data, Mechanical Variable Speed Drive 

246 



XV 

'A 

i 

n 

4 







5TKB0LS 


* 

A 


B.L. 


C.G. 


C 0 

CONVKN 

d c 

d g 

<i 

djn 

d o 

dp 

D 

E 

^d 

®L 

% 

h 

f C 

*r max 

ft 

ft aax 
P 


Acceleration 

Area, Strength Factor 

Buttock Line 

Center of Gravity 

Basic Static Capacity of Bearing 

Conventional 

Cable Diameter 

Gear Diameter 

Inside Diameter 

Mean Diameter 

Outside Diameter 

Pinion Diameter 

Diameter 

Modulus of Elasticity 

Drum Modulus of Elasticity 

Cable Longitudinal Modulus of Elasticity 

Cable Transverse Modulus of Elasticity 

Bending Stress 

Compressive Stress 

Maximum Radial Stress 

Torsional Shear Stress 

Maximum Tangential Stress 

Gear Face Width 

Axial Clutch Load 


xvi 





g 


H.L.H. 

HP 

I 

J 

K 

Ka 

H 

It L 
^drum 

^SCrSW 

m 

“b 

*bY 

**bH 

HP 

MMH 

M.S. 


Allowable Bending Stress 
Allowable Compressive Strese 
Coopresolve Yield Point 
Flight Hours 
Normal Force 

Fuselage Station, Factor of Safety 

Ultimate Tensile Strength 

Gravitational Constant 

Gallons per Minute 

Heavy Lift Helicopter 

Horsepower 

Moment of Inertia 

Polar Moment of Inertia 

Drum Pressure Constant 

Knots 

Stress Concentration Factor 
Length 

Lead of Drum 
Lead of Screw 
Mass 

Bending Moment 
Vertical Bending Moment 
Horizontal Bending Moment 
Hydraulic Motor 
Maintenance Man-Hours 
Margin of Safety 




“t 

MTBUMA 

n 


”1 


n.a. 

Ny, 

OGB 


Pc 

psi 


P all« 


r c r 

P e 

PF 

P limit 

p ult 

rp» 

B 

RES 


S 

t 

T 




W.L. 


Torsional Moment 

I 

Mean Time Between Unscheduled Maintenance Action 

i 

Number of Friction Surfaces in Brake ojr Clutch 
Number of Layers of Cable 

it 

Nautical Miles I' 1 


Change in Directional Restoring Stability 
Out of Ground Effect ! 

I 

Cable Pitch 


Pounds per Square Inch 

Axial Load, Pressure on Clutch or Brake Plates 
Allowable Load 
Cable Load 

i 

Critical Buckling Load 
External Pressure on Drum 
Hydraulic Puap 
Cable Limit Load 
Cable Ultimate Load 
Revolutions per Minute 
Bearing Reaction 
Reservoir 


Reduction Ratio 
Distance 
Thickness, Time 
Torque, Tension 
Weight 
Water Line 


4 




* 




xvili 



X 

z 

Zero Mom 

a 

y 

8 A 
2 

V 

e 

t 

p 

b 

V 

or 


Tangential Tooth Load 
Tooth Form Factor 
Section Modulus 
Zero Moment 

Lead Angle, Angular Acceleration 

Cable Pressure Angle 

Deflection 

Summation 

Efficiency 

Fore and Aft Cable Angle 
Side Cable Angle 
Density 

Coefficient of friction 
Poisson's Ratio 
Angular Velocity 



six 


\ 

■A- 



*“"*•«* ■ ***** 



INTRODUCTION 


The primary purpose of the heavy lift helicopter ie that of an aerial 
hoist and transporter for heavy loads including combat vehicles and ether 
large, bulky items which cannot be lifted by ether helicopters. There¬ 
fore, an initial consideration in the design of a 40,000-pound-payload 
heavy lift helicopter Mist necessarily be concerned with its external load 
handling winch and hoist system. 

To provide good reliability and maintainability, adequate in-flight safety, 
and simple and accurate controls at a mini mm weight, the cargo handling 
system must be designed concurrent with the helicopter airframe, particu¬ 
larly in those areas of interface. The basic airframe configurations used 
for this evaluation are those of the previous heavy lift transmission and 
rotor system studies conducted by Sikorsky Aircraft for USAA7LABS 
(References 3 and 4). The missions used for productivity analyses are 
also those of the previous studies. 




■0 


1 



PHASE I 


DESIGN ANAUSIS 


DISCUSSION 


In this initial phase, both separate function configurations and combined 
function configurations will be investigated for two basic external load 
handling system arrangements: single-point plus two-point load suspension 
and single-point plus four-point load suspension. 

Separate function configurations are those systems that incorporate indi¬ 
vidual single-point and multi-point hoists. Combined functions are those 
where the multipoint hoists are used to perform both the single and 
multi-point missions. Die hoist systems to be e \luated will Include 
those aircraft related components necessary for control, load attachment, 
suspension, hoisting, and isolation of the load from the aircraft. 

The systems will be evaluated on the basis of power requirements, system 
efficiency, weight, reliability, safety, maintainability, cost, and tech¬ 
nical confidence. At the completion of Phase I, Design Analysis, the 
single- plus two-point and single- plus four-point systems that best meet 
the cargo handling requirements of a 40,000-pound heavy lift helicopter 
will be selected and one of these will be recommended for preliminary 
design in Phase II. 


« 




2 




BASIC DATA 


DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 


The heavy lift helicopter external load handling system evaluated herein 
has been designed to meet the requirements shown in Table I. 

TABLE I 


BASIC DESIGN DATA 



Single- 

Point 

Two-Point 
(Per Hoist) 

Four-Point 
(Per Hoist) 

Load (lb) 

40,000 

23,100 

11,550 

Ultimate Load Factor 

3.75 

4.2 

4.2 

Usable Cable Length (ft) 

150/80 

50 

50 

Cable Angle - Static 

±30° 

±30° 

±30° 

- Dynamic 

±15° 

±15° 

±15° 

Minimum Cable Speed (fptn) 

60 

30 

30 

Minimum Service Interval (cycles) 


1200 


Minimum Retirement Interval (cycles) 


3600 


System Weight Goal (lb) 


4000 



MISSION RB3UIREMEWT3 

As an aid in evaluating the various external cargo handling system con¬ 
figurations covered herein, the following mission spectra were assumed 
for the 40, OOO-pound-payload heavy lift helicopter. It has also been 
assumed that there is an equal frequency of occurence of each mission. 

Transport Mission 


t 


■9 



2 Min. Hover 
Sea Level 
did Day 


3 


*** 






Transport Mission 


Payload 
Radius 
Vcruise 
Vcruise 
Hovering Time 

Reserve Fuel 
Hovering Capability 
Mission Altitude 
Fuel Allowance for Start, Warm-up, and Takeoff 
MIL-C-5011A 

Heavy Lift Mission 


10 Min. 

Hover 
Sea Level 

Std D«y 


20 n.m. 


Payload 
Radius 
Vcruise 
Vcruise 
Hovering Time 

Reserve Fuel 
Hover Capability 
Fuel Allowance for 
MIL-C-5011A 


AIRCRAFT DESCRIPTION 

Figures 1 and 2, pages 5 and 7 describe the single- and tandem-rotor heavy 
lift helicopters, respectively, used as the aerial vehicles for the cargo 
handling configuration studies covered herein. 


20 tons (outbound) 

20 n.m, 

95 knots (20-ton payload) 

130 knots (no payload) 

5 min. at takeoff 

10 min. at destination with payload 
10£ of initial fuel 
Sea level, standard atmosphere 
Start, Warm-up, and Takeoff 



12 tons (outbound) 

100 n.m. 

110 knots (12-ton payload) 

130 knots (no payload) 

3 min. at takeoff (with 12-ton payload) 

2 min. at midpoint * 

1 Of, of initial fuel 

6,0C0 ft, 95°F (OGE), takeoff gross 

Sea level, standard atmosphere 


4 



672 

1243(l03'-7") FUSELAGE LENGTH 
1381 (115-1") OVERALL LENGTH 


B. 




ROTOR DATA 
DIA. 

BLADE CHORD 
NO. OF BLADES 
BLADE AREA 
OVERLAP 
ASPECT RATIO 


70.58 
3.76’ 
3 , 

795.00 
23.30’ 
9.40 




Figure 2. Tandem-Rotor H.L.H. 





STA 

300 


4 I- 10* 



100 


198 


1402(117 


7 





INVESTIGATION OF VEHICLES 


To aid in the evaluation of various external load handling systems, it is 
necessary to survey the types of equipment to be carried. This informa¬ 
tion is basic, since it defines the aircraft-load interaction, the place¬ 
ment of hoists on the aircraft, and the means of load acquisition. Since 
the type of equipment to be carried was not specifically described in the 
contract, it was necessary to conduct a survey of the vehicles presently 
in use by the U.S. Array. A summary of the vehicles reviewed is contained 
in Appendix I. 

Of the 94 vehicles listed, only 37 (items 49 thru 86 of Appendix I) were 
in the 15,000- to 40,000-pound weight class. Since vehicles below 15,000 
pounds in weight are well within capabilities of other aircraft in the 
U.S. Amy inventory (i.e., the CH-47A and CH-54A),they were not considered 
to have a major influence on the cargo handling system design. Table II 
shows average, maximum, and minimum dimensions of vehicles in the 15,000- 
to 40,000-pound weight range. These envelope dimensions were used as an 
aid in the placement of the multi-point hoists on the aircraft. 


TABLE II 

U.S. ARMY VEHICLES - LENGTH AND WIDTH DIMENSIONS, 
_15.000- to 40.000-PQUND CLASS_ 



Minimum 

Average 

Maid mum 

Length, Inches 

169 

265.5 

600 

Width, Inches 

92 

106.5 

145 

Vehicle Designation 

M-114 

None 

CH-47 

Item Number* 

49 

- 

56 

Net Weight, Pounds 

15,000 

- 

16,000 


♦Item number in .'^pendix I 


A list of vehicles greater than 130 inches in height is shown in Table III. 
Three vehicles (the CH-47, the M-129 STIii Van, and the M-292 Truck Van) 
allow less that what is considered to be a practical clearance for any 
form of ground type pickup. The unloaded ground clearance of both single- 
and tandem-rotor heavy lift helicopters is 156 inches (Reference Figures 
1 and 2, pages 5 and 7)* Therefore, a clearance of lees than 17 inches is 
considered inadequate due to the landing gear oleo compression during the 
hoisting of vehicles. This dictates hovering pickup for vehicles of this 
size. 


9 


at--*—.Ayal .fii) - 1 »VtTH' -.Mir* 


TABLE ZIX 

U.S. ARM! VEHICLES WITH HEIGHTS OF 130 INCHES OR MORE* 

CLASS 


M 313 STLR Van Equip. 
M 220 Truck Van 
M 109 Truck Van 
CH-47 Helicopter 
M 129 STLR Van 
M 292 Truck Van Equip. 


♦Item number in Appendix I 


It was impossible, within the scope and tine frame of this study, to com¬ 
plete investigation of the aerodynamic properties of all 37 vehicles in 
the single- , two- , and four-point hoist suspension modes. Therefore, a 
representative nunber of vehicles, as shown in Table IV, were selected as 
tjp uO and formed the basis for the hoist system configuration 
and aircraft-load interaction study. 



TABLE IV 

TTPICAL U.S. ARM* VEHICLES 


Length Width Height Weight 


oMfbEiBHfCiEjCMw 


Iu2J 


155 m Howitser 190 
Persomel Carrier 169 
5-Ton Wrecker Med. 310 
Self-Propelled Mortar 221 


12,700 

15,276 

33,320 

43,200 


•Item number in Appendix I 


Part of the efficiency of the four-point system is derived from its 
ability to be hooked directly to fittings on many types of loads (see 
page 94 ). For this reason, more data on the size, location, and struc¬ 
tural adequacy of pickup points on all of the 37 vehicles is needed to 
finalize the hoist locations. 


10 














While these data are not required if the two-point system is used (see 
page 91 ), it would be valuable if the size, location, and structural 
adequacy of the pickup points were known. The use of slings that can be 
attached directly to fittings on the vehicle will be sinpler and more 
efficient than the development of methods for attachment of a standard 
nylon web sling to the underside of all the 37 vehicles. 




L 


11 



HOIST SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS DESIGN 


HOIST LOCATION AND TYPE 


Introduction 

The external cargo handling systems to be evaluated herein will incorporate 
provisions for lifting and cariying 40,000 pounds in both single- and 
multi-point modes. Systems that incorporate individual single- and multi¬ 
point hoists (separate function) and those that employ one system to per- 
fora both modes of operation (combined function) will be studied for both 
single- and tandem-rotor aircraft. 

Hoist Location - Single-Rotor Aircraft 

The single-point hoist for the single-rotor aircraft of Figure 1 
is located directly under the main rotor at F.S. 550 to minimize the 
effect of load oscillations on aircraft stability. It is . seated in a 
well in the fuselage and will not extend below the airfraiut when the hook 
is in the full-up position. This will permit a can > or personnel pod to 
be carried by the multi-point hoists without removal of the single-point 
hoists. The main gearbox support structure can be utilized to provide the 
required hoist mounting with a minimum increase in weight. 

The two-point hoists are located on B.L. 0 at F.S. 406 and F.S. 694. The 
horizontal spacing of 288 inches was based on the survey of military ve¬ 
hicles in the 15,000- to 40,000-pound weight clasB. It allows most of 
tho vehicles in this category to be lifted off the ground in the ground 
pickup mode. The hoists are located in wells in the fuselage so that they 
do not extend below the airframe when the hooks are in the full-up posi¬ 
tion, This permits the pod to be pulled up and locked to the fuselage. 

This relatively high hoist location also reduces the effect of lateral 
load oscillations on aircraft controllability, since the cable reaction 
point is quite close to the location of the center of gravity of the air¬ 
craft. Hoi'it well size requires the addition of approximately 40 pounds 
to the airframe structure. The selection of these locations for the two- 
point hoists may conflict with the airframe designers desirable location 
for fuel cells. 

The four-point hoists are located on B.L. 70 and at F.S. 406 and F.S. 694. 
Horizontal and lateral spacing was selected to achieve compatibility dur¬ 
ing ground pickup with the widest variety of loads. The hoists are uni¬ 
versally mounted on a davit type structure with suitable aerodynamic fair¬ 
ing, and they do not extend below the fuselage. This permits a pod to be 
pulled up and locked to the fuselage. As in the two-point system, this 
relatively high hoist location also reduces the effect of lateral load 
oscillations on aircraft controllability, since the cable reaction point 
is quite close to the location of the center of gravity of the aircraft. 

The universal-type mounting permits the hoists to be pivoted in order to 
reach attachment points on outsized vehicles without inducing heavy side 
loads on the hoist. Figure 3, page 13, shows the load attachment point 
space envelope and its variation with distance between hoist and the 


12 




t 



Figure 3. Four-Point Hoiet Load Attachment Point 
Space Envelope, 


Note: Area enclosed by circles gives physical di¬ 
mensions of pickup points on loads that can be 
lifted without exceeding the peradssible 60° 
cone angle for the four-point hoists at cable 
lengths specified, 

i 


b 

& 


23 




ground with ths hoist locations and cable angles selected. Page 22 con¬ 
tains an explanation of the cable angle requirement. 


TABLE V 

HOIST LOCATION* - SINGLE-ROTOR AIRCRAFT 



Single-Point 

Hoist 

Two-Point 

Hoist 

Four-Point 

Hoist 

Fuselage Station 

550 

406 & 694 

406 & 694 

Buttock Line 

11.25 right to 
11.25 left** 

0 

70 

Waterline: 

Longitudinal Cable Swing 

210 

200 

200 

Lateral Cable Swing 

175 

200 

200 


♦Locations described refer to actual cable reaction point 


♦•With 150 feet of cable 


The actual cable reaction points given in Tables V and VI 
indicate a variation in the waterline location for lateral and longitu¬ 
dinal cable swing for the single-point hoist. This variation, as illus¬ 
trated in the sketch below, is due to the basic design of the hoist. 



FRONT VIM SIDE VJM 


H 








Figure 4. Conventional Design - Single-Point Holst. 


A . 


15 




BELLMOUTH 














SIDE SUPPORT 




INCHES 


c 




Hoist Location - Tandem-Rotor Aircr>ift 


In the tandem-rotor aircraft (Figure 2, page 7) the single-point hoist is 
located approximately midway between the rotors to minimize the effect of 
load oscillations on aircraft stability. It is installed in a well in the 
fuselage and does not extend below the fuselage when the hook is in the 
full-up position. This allows pods to be carried by the multi-point 
hoists without removal of the single-point hoist* 

The two-point hoists are located on B.L. 0 at F.S. 413 and F.S. 701. The 
horizontal spacing of 288 inches was based on the survey of military ve¬ 
hicles in the 15*000- to 40*000-pound weight class* It allows most of the 
vehicles in this category to be lifted off the ground in the ground pick¬ 
up mode. 

The hoists are located in wells in the fuselage so that they do not extend 
below the airframe when the hook is in the full-up position. This permits 
pods to be lifted up and locked to the fuselage* Since the hoists are 
located relatively high in the fuselage* the effect of lateral load oscil¬ 
lations on aircraft controllability is quite small. Hoist well size re¬ 
quires the addition of approximately 40 pounds to the airframe structure. 

In addition, this could conflict with the most desirable fuel cell loca¬ 
tion. No attempt has been made to assess the importance of this conflict 
in this study. 

The four-point hoists are located on B.L. 70 at F.S. 413 and F.S. 701* 
since this ensures compatibility during ground pickup with most of the ve¬ 
hicles in the 15,000- to 40,000-pound weight category. The hoists are 
universally mounted on a davit type structure with suitable aerodynamic 
fairings. Full-op position of the hooks permits pods to be pulled up and 
locked to the fuselage. As in the two-point system* this relatively high 
location reduces the effect of load oscillations on aircraft controlla¬ 
bility. The universal mounting permits the hoists to be pivoted to reach 
attachment points on out sized vehicles without Inducing heavy side loads 
on the hoists. 

Single-Point Holst 

The conventional (one part, single reeved type) hoist offers the most ad¬ 
vantages for application in the single-point location. Because it need not 
be mounted on a universal-type joint, it can be driven mechanically. It 
can also fit into a well which has limited vertical space. The drum axis 
is mounted at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the aircraft* and 
the level wind assembly is allowed to pivot about the drum axis. This per¬ 
mits large cable angles during tow operations without inducing high loads 
on the bellmouth. The simplest and most reliable version is the one that 
requires only one layer of cable wrapped on the drum. Multiple layering 
is possible but it requires the use of a more complicated, less efficient* 
and less reliable type of feed screw to ensure even winding of the cable. 
Figure 4* page 15* shows the conventional* single-layer hoist similar to 
that used in the CH-54A. 


17 



TABLE VI 


HOIST LOCATION* 

- TANDBC-R0T0R AIRCRAFT 




Single-Point 

Hoist 

Two-Point 

Hoist 



Fuselage Station 

557** 

423 & 701 

413 ft 701 


Buttock Line 

0 

0 

0 

* 

Waterline: 

Longitudinal Cable Swing 

165 

200 

200 


Lateral Cable Swing 

190 

200 

200 



♦Locations described refer to actual cable reaction point 


♦"With one-half usable cable length extended 


For the single-rotor aircraft of this study* a maxi nun cable length of 100 
feet can be carried on a single-layer hoist without exceeding desirable 
lateral cyclic stick movement. The limitation on cyclic stick movement is 
based on that presently attained in the CH-54A. 

For the tandem-rotor aircraft of this study, the single-point hoist drum 
can be mounted with its axis located parallel to the aircraft longitudinal 
centerline. With this arrangement, the only limitations in cable length 
are those iiqposed by permissible C.G. range and/or hoist well siae. This 
installation, however, restricts the towing capability of the tandem-rotor 
aircraft from the single-point hoist. 

Another type of hoist investigated in this study was the two-part, double- 
reeved type shown in Figure 5, page 19. This type is used extensively in 
coamerclal practice. The two-part, double-reeved hoist has two primary 
disadvantages when compared to the conventional (one-part, single-reeved) 
hoist. A cable backlash suppressor will be required to keep the cable 
from jumping off tno drums, both pulleys on the traveling block, and the 
upper pulley when a load is air dropped. While a suppressor has already 
been developed for the conventional hoist, the suppressor required for the 
double-reeved type will be considerably more cooler. Cable cutters for 
the double-reeved hoist have to be mounted in four places to ensure that a 
sheared cable will not jam up in one of the three pulleys. This require¬ 
ment for four cable cutters reduces the inherent safety features of the 
single-point suspension. 




18 


















The use of a conductor reel to provide a means of transmit ting electrical 
power to the hook adds approximately 50 pounds to the weight of the single- 
point hoist system* In addition, the use of the reel also reduces the 
reliability of the system because of the added complexity and the rela¬ 
tively unprotected location of the conductor cable. 

Two-Point Holsts 


Both the conventional and the eero-moment hoists are applicable to the two- 
point requirement. A zero-moment hoist is one which maintains the same 
line of action for the load for all lengths of cable extended and hence 
always has the same reaction point on the supporting structure. 

Since there is no requirement to have the two-point hoists pivot laterally 
in order to pick up outsised loads, the use of a zero-moment hoist is not 
mandatory. Its greater vertical dimension, required to mount a load 
isolator most efficiently, requires the use of a deeper well in the fuselage. 

The conventional hoist, as described in the Single-Point Hoist section, 
fits in a shallower well in the fuselage and is equally adaptable to both 
mechanical and hydraulic power sources. Therefore, since there is only a 
limited amount of vertical space available in the fuselage of either the 
single- or tandem-rotor aircraft, a conventional hoist is the most advan¬ 
tageous. 

Due to variations in the size of loads to be carried in the multi-point 
mode, it is necessary to increase the design load rating of the two-point 
hoists to account for cable angle. A cable angle (with the vertical) of 
30° has been selected to permit variations in longitudinal dimension of 
load. The required hoist rating is then 


Rating - - 23,100 pounds (l) 


Four-Point Hoists 

The use of the zero-moment hoist is mandatory in the four-point system. 

Its ability to be pivoted to any position allows attachment to a wide 
variety of cargo sizes and shapes. A mechanical drive system for the aero*, 
moment hoist will be extremely complicated, while hydraulic power offers 
automatic load equalizing, and, by use of a feedback system (see Figure 13, 
page 48), permits synchronised operation. 

Sikorsky Aircraft experience has shown that a capstan type hoist offers 
weight advantages only when the long cable lengths art required, as in 
rescue winch applications. For hoists requiring only 50 feet of cable at 
low speed and relatively high load capability (such aa the H.L.H. multi¬ 
point application), the capstan principle offers no advantages; in fact, 
there may be some penalties in weight and cable life. 


21 



A single drum design, universally mounted, offers lighter weight, greater 
cable life, and somewhat more reliability. In configurations that elim¬ 
inate the single-point hoi"t. it is necessary to use three layers of cable 
in oruer to retain the -ero-tA&ment capability. As discussed in the Single- 
Point. Hoist section, multiple layering requires the use of a more compli¬ 
cated and somewhat less reliable type of feed screw than is needed in a 
single-layer design. Figure 6 , page 23, shows a typical single-layer, zero- 
moment hoist* 

It should also be noted that it Is necessary to increase the design load 
rating above the theoretically possible rating of 10,000 pounds, since it 
is not possible to lift the wide variety of loads required with this rating. 
If cable angles (with the vertical) of 30° are utilized to permit the 
necessary variation in load length and width, a hoist rating of 10,000/Cos 
30° " 11,550 pounds is required. Figure 3, page 13, shows the allowable 
load attachment point space envelope with the selected hoist locations anl 
the 30° cable angle requirement. 


HOIST DESIGN 


Discussion 

The initial consideration in the design of a hoist is the selection of a 
cable that meets the load and functional requirements (i.e., nonrotating 
construction with electrical conductors in the core) for this study. Once 
the cable diameter and the wire size to be used in the cable have been 
selected, the drum diameter can be calculated. Using standard conmorcial 
practice which requires cable drum diameter to be a minimum of 400 times 
the individual wire diameter, it is possible to determine minimum drum 
diameter requirements. Other considerations may dictate larger drum diam¬ 
eters, however. In the case of the single-point hoist, the determining 
factor Is the requirement to carry as much cable as possible without exceed¬ 
ing desirable aircraft control limitations (see Single-Point Hoist section, 
page 17)* After the drum diameter has been established, the drum thickness 
Is determined by analysis. Once this is completed, the gearing system can 
be established and the load brake can be integreted into the primary gear 
train. The auxiliary gear train is then designed into the level wind arms 
to provide power for scrub rollers and level wind screw drives. For a 
single layer of cable, a simple ball screw and nut can be used, whereas in 
multiple layer hoists, a more complex double helix screw is required. 

The accessory drive gearing can then be designed to provide drives for slip 
rings, cable length Indicator potentiometers, and limit switch actuators. 
Cable cutters, cable backlash clamps (or covers), guide rollers, and limit 
switches are next Integrated into the final design. The support structure 
is designed to conform to established mounting structures, and load cell? 
and Isolator units are designed into the support structure. 


22 








































nr—— LOAD BRAKE 
3 

—CABLE TENSION — 
ROLLERS 


LEVEL WINO 
FEED SCREW 



























Three cable sizes are needed to meet the requirements for the single-point, 
two-point, and four-point hoists. All cables are designed to carry seven 
electrical conductors in a centred core and are of nonrotating construc¬ 
tion. Five conductors are used to operate the cargo hook; two are spare 
wires. All are of an extra flexible 18 x 19 construction. A 1.39 diameter 
is required to meet the 150,000-pound minimum breaking strength require¬ 
ment of the single-point hoist. A 1.06 diameter cable meets the 97,000- 
pound requirement for the two-point hoist, and a 0.79 diameter cable neets 
the 48,500-pound requirement for the four-point hoist. 

Since the aircraft's angular accelerations in a maneuver are combined with 
the linear acceleration effects, the loads at all multi-point hoist attach¬ 
ment points are increased. This load magnification is due to the location 
of the hoist attachment points some distance from the aircraft's center 
of gravity. Therefore, an ultimate load factor of 4.2 is required for all 
multi-point hoists instead of the 3.75 value used for the single-point 
hoist. Further details on hoist cables are found in the Hoist Cables 
section, page 49* 


The basis for hoist drum analysis for both single and multiple layers of 
cable is given on the following pages. 

Single Layer of Cable: 



25 



Stresses in the hoisting drum shell are the result of loads imposed by: 
External pressure (P # ) from coiling of ropes under tension 
Bending maaent (M^) from rope tension 

Torsional moment (M^) due to pcwer transmission from the gear 
train to the rope 

These loads and stresses can be calculated from the following equations: 


Pc 




where 

A is equal to 

P„ L 

\ - -v 

where 

Z is equal to 




\ 

2Z 




4 

1 - ( 1 - -&-) 
d 

o 


( 2 ) 

( 3 ) 

( 4 ) 

( 5 ) 

( 6 ) 

( 7 ) 

( 8 ) 
( 9 ) 


Por the hoist drums designed in this study, the length-^to-diameter ratio 
is approximately equal to 1. Therefore, for the purposes of finding the 
approximate magnitude of the compressive, bending, and torsional stresses, 
the following assumptions can be made: 

L " d o " " D 


26 



Combining equations (2), (3)> and (4),we obtain 


*c 


Pc* 


( 10 ) 


Combining equations (5)> (6), and (7), we obtain 



Combining equations (7), (8), and (9X we obtain 



By using the previously mentioned assumptions, it can be seen that the 
bending and torsional stresses are of the same order of magnitude. 

In ord#r to compare the magnitudes of the stresses further, the following 
assumptions can be made: 


t 

D 


.038 


D - 25 t - .95 


1 


These assumptions are within average values used in this study. 
Substituting these values into equations (10) and (ll),we obtain 


f r 

\S\ 

-*c 


( 13 ) 

c 


.914 


*b 

rj 

'V/ 

f. A/ 
t rJ 

P c 

Twil 

( 14 ) 


Therefore, the bending and torsional stresses in the hoisting dnm shells 
used in this study are in the order of magnitude of 70 times less than the 
compressive stresses and may be neglected when designing the drums. 

Material Trade-off Investigation 

The following materials have been tentatively selected for use in the 
drum: 


27 





TABLE VII 

PRIM MATERIAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 


Material 

P tu 

Ultimate 

Tensile 

Strength 

Held 

Strength 

Density 

(lb/in.3) 

7079-T6 Aluminum 

72,000 

65,000 

.099 

AZ8QA-T5 Magnesium 

42,000 

25,000 

.0652 

4340 Steel 

180,000 

179,000 

.283 


The drum weight per inch le given by 


W - t d c (-f 


-1 )p * 


(15) 


Since the design is based on compressive stress only, equations (13) and 
(15) mj be selred simultaneously te give 


V - 


P ▼ d c 


( 16 ) 


For a given hoist drum, d o> Pc* and will be constant. Hence, the 
lightest druB will be the drum with the lowest value of p? c /t c » 

The following is a design relationship for cable load: 

P c (ult) - 1.304 P c (yisld) ( 17 ) 


Ths weight of the drum must be investigated under ultimate and yield con¬ 
ditions. To accomplish this, the following constants can be evaluated: 


ult - Ci - 


yield - C 2 


P* c 


Jdt_ . 1.30 U P T c yield 


"tu 

P P c yield 

F_1 

cy 


r tu 


(16) 

(19) 


28 



The values of P , F tu , and F^ for different materials may new be sub¬ 
stituted Into the preceding equations. The lightest drum based ea ultimate 
load conditions will be tbs drum with the lowest value of C^. The lightest 
drum based on yield load conditions will be the drum with the lowest value 
of C 2 . The design will then be based on the load conditions which produce 
the highest value of or Cg for a particular material. Substitution of 
the values of p and ?_ Into equations (IS) and (19) for various 

materials is given below: 

1. 7079-T6 Aluminum forging 

C, - Ic ylg3,d . 1#?9 x 10 -6 p ^ eld 

1 F tu C 

C 2 , P P c ■ 1.52 x 10" 6 P c yield 

cy 


2. AZ8QA-T5 Magnesium forging 

C - 3 ,« 3°4 P P c d . 2.02 x lCf 6 P„ yield 

1 F tu C 

C 2 - - - 2.60 x 10” 6 P c yield 

cy 


3. 4340 Steel forging 

C. - - 2.05 x 10 -6 P c yield 

"tu 

C 2 - ..P I sl ^? )A — . 1.58 x 10" 6 P c yield 

cy 

Therefore, the 7079-T6 aluminum forging, based on ultimate load conditions, 
will result in the lightest hoist drum design. The aluminum drum will be 
31 pet lighter than a magnesium dnm (designed for yield conditions) and 
12 pet lighter than a steel drum (designed for ultimate conditions). 


29 


'«***»*>* wwaamtiWEB 



Notes The use of a maraging steel of P^ u - 250,000 psl will re¬ 
sult In a significant weight savings. This design will, how¬ 
ever, have a very low thickness to diameter ratio and may pre¬ 
sent machining problems because of distortion of the thin-walled 
drum. Maraging steels have also been known to present 
stress corrosion problems. In addition, the cost is approxi¬ 
mately six times that of alumintn. Therefore, high strength 
steel was not used for the hoisting drum. However, it is 
worthy of further study as a possible means of weight saving 
along with the titanium alloys and glass. An evaluation of 
these materials will be conducted as part of Phase II if time 
permits. 

Drum Thlckn e e Analysis 

The equation .. r cos*)receive stress may now be solved directly for thick¬ 
ness to diameter ratio using P^ u for 7079-T6 aluminum r 


1 - 

d o 

Table VIH 
two-point. 


1 _ l6qaO£Lr.. P A ujt 

2 / 144,000 


( 20 ) 


summarizes the drat thickness calculations for the single-point, 
and four-point hoists with a single layer of cable. 


TABLE VIII 


DRUM THICKNESS SUMMARY, 
SINGLE CABLE L'YER DESIGNS' 

» 




Two- 

Four- 


Point 

Point 

Point 

P c - Cable load (ult), lb 

150,000 

97,000 

48,500 

p - Cable pitch, in. 

1.5 

1.1875 

.875 

dg - Mean drum dla., in. 

38.99 

29.69 

22.19 

P e - External pressure (ult), pel 

5290 

5500 

5190 

t/d 0 - Calculated 

.0382 

.0398 

.0376 

d 0 - Effective drum CD, in. 

37.806 

28.905 

21.568 

t - Drum thickness, in. 

1.44 

1.15 

.81 

N - Weight of drum, lb per in. 

16.40 

10.03 

5.22 


•Drum Material: 7079-T6 Aluminum Alloy 


30 









Multiple Layers of Cable 


Since the external pressure caused by coiling of the cable under constant 
tension is the major factor in the design of drums considered in this 
study, it is important to determine this pressure accurately. When there 
is more than one layer of cable on the drum, the pressure increases, but 
not as a direct ratio of the number of layers. The outer cables tend to 
compress the inner cables and drum, thereby relieving some of the pressure 
originally caused by the inner cables. The general equation for the 
pressure on the drum ie given by 


P 

e 


2 K P c 
P c *m 


( 21 ) 


where 

K is a factor less than 

(number of cable layers) 

For n-|_ - 1, K m l. K can be calculated from 


K 



J -1 


2 A El 

p fd 0 +d c siny(2j-2)] 
c 


1 

E d 





K - 

j(K 2 -l) + (nr-K 2 ) 

A »c(*l -J) 

'(“l-J-l) K 

\ 

"1 - 1 

Bt(nr2) 

(n x -l) d 0 




(1-1) 1 



<*o + d c 

sin y (2j - 4) J 


( 22 ) 


where the last tern is equal to 0 for n.< 3 (term with in 
denominator) 


The trial and error solutions to this equation for single and multi-point 
multiple layer hoist drums are presented in Table IX. 


31 



TABLE IX 

DRUM THICKNESS SUMMARI, 


MULTIPLE CABLE LAYEB DESIGN 



Single- 
Point 

2 Layers 

Single- 
Point 

3 Layers 

Two- 

Point 

3 Layers 

Four- 

Point 

3 Layers 

Pc 

- Cable load (ult), lb 

150,000 

150,000 

97,000 

48,500 

Pc 

- Cable pitch, in. 

1.5 

1.5 

1.1875 

.875 


- Drun naan dim, in. 

38.99 

38.99 

29.69 

22.19 

d o 

- Drua effective OD, in. 

37.806 

37.806 

28.905 

21.568 

K 

- Drun pressure constant 

1.495 

1.939 

1.961 

1.930 

p . 

- External pressure, psi 

7,670 

9,950 

10,790 

9,740 

t/do 

- Calculated 

.0565 

.0747 

.0816 

.0730 

t 

- Drun thickness, in. 

2.14 

2.82 

2.36 

1.57 

W 

- Drun waight, lb per in. 

23.978 

31.026 

19.661 

9.887 


Hoist Gearing Configurations and Load Brake 

Three different gear arrangeaents were considered. Table X swuarizes the 
overall gear ratios required for the single- , two- , and four-point 
hoists using a high- and low* speed input drive. 


TABLE X 

HOIST GEAR RATIOS 




Single-Point 

Two-Point 

Pour-Point 

High-speed input, rpa 

6000 

6500 

7200 

Law-speed input, rpa 

3000 

2500 

2750 

Output rpa 

6.1 

4.02 

5.34 

Overall ratio (high) 

983.6 

1616.9 

1348.3 

Overall ratio (low) 

491.8 

621.9 

515.0 

Min. stages of gearing (high HR) 

5 

5 

5 

Min. stages of gearing (low RR) 

4 

4 

4 


32 












I 


As can be seen in Table X, four gear stages are required for the low input 
drive speeds,while five gear stages are required for the high input drive 
speeds. These numbers refer to conventional gear stages such as a spur 
gear and pinion or a conventional planetary arrangement (sun gear driving, 
ring gear fixed, cage driven). If a compound planetary is used, the num¬ 
ber of stages can be reduced by one or two because of the higher ratios 
obtained. 

In general, a spur mesh will be lighter for low torque and a planetary 
will be li gh ter for high torque applications because of the load splitting 
capabilities. All of the hoist designs use a Weston brake for controlling 
the load. This type of brake holds the load when the power source is shut 
off, locks as a unit when raising the load, and slips at the same speed 
as the driver when lowering the load. The Weston brake should be located 
in the gear train a minimum of one gear stage from the input drive. This 
is to assure locking in the event of a mechanical failure at the drive 
source,which is usually the weak link. The small drag provided by the 
first stage will prevent load runaway by providing the torque necessary to 
lock the brake plates when lowering the load. Since the Weston brake is a 
purely mechanical device, the load can be maintained in the event of a 
hydraulic failure or a mechanical failure of the drive train which occurs 
before the brake input. 

The following discussion refers to a hoist utilizing low-speed inputs. 

For high-speed inputs, another planetary stage can be added. Figure 7 
shows a hoist arrangement utilizing three conventional planetary stages 
and a spur gear input stage. 


| 

I 

I 


f 

1 


DRIVE “7 i— WESTON BRAKE 



Figure 7. General Gear Arrangement - One 
Spur and Three Planetary. 


33 


... ■ ysjjjg 





In the arrangement shown in Figure 7, it is required that the motor be 
located off the centerline of the hoist. This may cause interference 
p rob leas with the dim and motor mount. Figure 8 shows another gear con¬ 
figuration using two spur gear meshes and two conventional planetary stages. 
In this arrangement, the drive is located on the hoist centerline, and the 
two side plates can be rigidly connected. 



Figure 8. General Gear Arrangement - Two 
Spur and Two Planetary. 







Figure 9 is a compound planetary driven hoist arrangement. It can be de¬ 
signed with reduction ratios of 3*1 to 150*1. A design of this type can 
replace three conventional planetary stages at a AO pet weight savings. 
Its disadvantage is that its efficiency is somewhat lower than that of 
three conventional plane tar ies. A 131:1 compound planetary was designed 
with an efficiency of approximately 92 pet, while the efficiency of an 
equivalent system using three conventional planetar ies was approximately 
98 pc*. 


TUB) RING 
GEAR 


CAGE 

(NO LOAD) 


OUTPUT 

RDD 

GEAR 


INPUT SUN 
GEAR 


L PLANETARY 
PINIONS 


HOIST 


Figure 9. General Gear Arrangement 
Compound Planetary. 


35 







I 


Figure 10 shows a general gear arrangement for a compound planetary with 
a conventional planetary for the first stage. This arrangement Is the 
lightest considered* but approximately 6 pet In efficiency Is sacrificed. 



Figure 10. General Gear Arrangement - 

Conventional and Compound Planetary. 


36 







syawor 


A complete eunaary of all the cargo hoist types evaluated in this study is 
given in Tables XI and Cl, pages 37 and 3d. The weight given includes 
the weight of hooks and cables but omits the weight of the power source, 
since both mechanical and hydraulic pcsrer sources were considered. 

The single-point hoist designated "E" was included since it offers a modi¬ 
fied zero-moment capability and a significant weight savings. Its dis¬ 
advantages, as discussed on page Id, outweigh these advantages; hence, 
further study of this type is not considered necessary. All hoists have 
been designed to permit removal from the aircraft without removal of the 
power source. Gear drives, hydraulic motors, and lines will remain with 
the aircraft. 

POWER SOURCES 

^raullc 

Hydraulic motor drive for either the two- or four-point hoists is possible 
with existing hardware. However, the pump and motor required for the 
single-point hoist will require some development. This development and 
modification is required to adapt to normal temperature environmental 
operation, since these unite are presently designed for the extreme tam- 
perature environments on the XB-70. The motor will be a modification of a 
pump used in this aircraft. The development effort could be reduced if 
two smaller motors, geared to a coiroon input shaft, were used in place of 
a large single motor drive. All hydraulic motor combinations offer vari¬ 
able speed control for the single-point hoist. The pump required for con¬ 
figurations that use hydraulic power for the multi-point hoists only, while 
not a production unit, is of conventional design and hence should not re¬ 
quire any development effort. 


TABLE XIII 


HYDRAULIC PUMP SUMKART 


ADDlication 

HP 

OutDUt 

HPM 

Diap. 

(cu in./rev) 

^Flow 

Weight 

(lb) 

Single and 
Multi-point 

150 

3500 

5.873 

68 

55 


Multi-point 

only 


100 


4000 


2.80 


45 


35 



‘rt w*‘ vxmv 


■ n**r f.- 


Both high- ani low-speed hoist motors were considered in the preliminary 
system evaluation in order to determine which type would best meet the re¬ 
quirements. Preliminary calculations indicated that the weight advantage 
offered by the high-speed motors was offset by the weight of the added 
transmission system drive gearing. Since weights are nearly equivalent, 
the low-speed motors were selected because they offered a greater relia¬ 
bility and longer life as compared to the high-speed designs. The motor 
selected for both traction sheaves and the conductor reel is a standard, 
off-the-shelf component. 


TABLE XIV 

HYDRAULIC MOTOR SUMMARY 


Hoist 

Designation 

Output 

RPM 

Disp. 

(cu in./rev) 

Wow 

(oau) 

Weight 

(ibT 

A, AA, B, C, D, 

104 

3000 

5.25 

68 

44 

X 

104 

6000 

2.70 

68 

24 

H, J, N 

70 

4050 

2.50 

45 

22 

A, B, C, D, X 

52* 

4400 

1.80 

34 

19 

P, G, 

35 

2500 

2.35 

22.5 

22 

L, M, 

35 

6500 

0.95 

22.5 

11 

K, P, 

17.5 

2750 

0.95 

11.1 

10 

Conductor Reel 

17.5 

7200 

0.367 

11.4 

5 

Traction Sheaves 

1.0 

1700 

0.095 

0.70 

2.6 


•Two motors required per hoist 


Mechanical 

All mechanical drive systems for the single-rotor helicopter are driven by 

an auxiliary power plant and rotor powered accessory gearbox. This permits , 

ground operation without the rotors turning. In flight, the accessory 

gearbox is shaft driven by the main gearbox. An identical system is used 

to power auxiliary drives on the CH-53A. Another version, in which the 

auxiliary power plant drives the accessory gear train in the main gearbox 

during operation, is used on the CH-54A. These concepts facilitate • 

ground check-outs of all systems, since a pilot is not required to "run up* 

the aircraft. In a tandem-rotor aircraft, similar design principles can be 

utilised to permit this type of operation. 

A clutch-reverser unit mounted on the gearbox is used to provide the oppo¬ 
site shaft rotation required for raising and lowering. By actuating both 
clutches, the mechanical drive system can be disengaged from the accessory 


40 





gearbox when hoist operation is not required. An alternate type of power 
takeoff unit is described in Appendix II. It was not used in this phase 
of the study because it is not a fully developed unit. The concepts* how¬ 
ever* are now being used in similar units for constant speed drives In 
several operational aircraft. The mechanical variable speed drive offers 
variable speed drive for the mechanical system and is considered worthy 
of further study. 

The angle gearboxes and drive shafts utilized follow standard Sikorsky 
Aircraft design practice similar to that utilized in tail rotor drive 
system gearboxes and tail drive shafts. No development problems are antic¬ 
ipated for these units. 

The individual hoist clutches required in the mechanical drive versions 
for the multi-point hoists follow standard automotive and marine practice. 
They are multiple disc types in which the actuation force is supplied by 
oil at 250 psi. This oil* provided by an accessory gearbox mounted pump* 
is also used to cool the clutch plates. 

Auxiliary Power Plant (APP) 

All the external cargo handling systems considered in this study will be 
powered either hydraulically or mechanically from the aircraft accessory 
drive gearbox. This unit is driven from the primary rotor drive train 
when the rotor system is operating and from an auxiliary power plant (APP) 
on the ground to permit ground check-out and acquisition of loads when the 
rotor system is locked. 

A separate gas turbine as the sole source of power for the hoist systems 
was considered and was rejected because it was heavier and less reliable. 
For an APP driven cargo system* an APP with a hot day output power ranging 
from 100 to 170 horsepower (reference Tables XVII and XVIII* pages 07 and 
89) depending on the system configuration* is required. In addition* this 
system requires either continuous operation of the APP in flight or re¬ 
start for raising or lowering cargo at the acquisition or release site. 

Electrical 

There are no electric motors of aircraft quality available in the 100- 
horsepower class required for the 8 ingle-point hoists nor in the 3 5-horse¬ 
power class required for the two-point hoists. A ant or is available in 
the 17.5-horsepower class required for the four-point hoists. However* 
its weight of 17*5 pounds* compared to 5 pounds for a similar high-speed 
hydraulic motor* plus the requirement for large electrical lines and con¬ 
siderably larger alternators* would require a considerable weight increase. 
Therefore* an electrical motor drive was not considered feasible for the 
external cargo handling system power source. 




U 



CLUTCH-REVERSES UNIT 


A clutch-reveraer unit is mounted on the aircraft accessory drive gearbox 
and tranmite power in either direction of rotation to the hoists. It 
consists of twin reversing clutches. By declutching both of the reversing 
clutches, the mechanical drive system can be disengaged from the power 
source when hoist operation is not required. Oil required to actuate the 
piston which clamps up the plates in these clutches is supplied at 250 psi 
by a puap mounted on the accessory gearbox. By controlling the pressure 
rise to 250 pel, smooth, shock-free operation is obtained. Ibis same oil 
supply (transmission oil) is also used as a coolant for the clutches when 
they are dieengaged. The use of a clutching arrangement, which can be un¬ 
coupled from the power source, is possible because each hoist incorporates 
an automatic load holding brake. By providing smooth, shock-free accelera¬ 
tion of loads, the need for a variable speed drive can be eliminated. 

In the event that it becomes mandatory to provide variable speed operation 
of the single-point hoist, the clutch-reveraer unit can be replaced by a 
toroid drive unit of the type described in Appendix II. While units of 
the else required for this application have not been built, the design 
concept has been proven by use of smaller units for constant speed drives 
presently installed lu the Navy A4E. 


CO NTROL SYSTEMS 
Dlscwslon 

The control system employed for both single and multi-point hoists is de¬ 
pendent upon the type of power source utilised for each system. For each 
of the two power sources considered in this study (mechanical and hydrau¬ 
lic), a separate control system approach must be devised. Basically, the 
mechanical drive concepts require mechanical clutching operations, while 
the hydraulic drives are flow controlled. In the multi-point systems, the 
mechanical drive concepts require electromechanical feedback, while the 
hydraulic drives employ both electromechanical and fcydromechanical feed¬ 
back to provide load equalisation and/or synchronisation. All systems 
utilise electrical control of mechanical and/or hydraulic components in 
order to enable control functions to be accomplished by the pilot, the 
copilot, and a dismounted craw member. 

Single-Point Hoist Control System - Hydraulic Power Source 

A single pump mounted on the accessory gearbox supplies the hoist motor. 
This pump is also ussd to supply the four-point hoists in ths -2 config¬ 
uration. The hydraulic system is a pressure demand type in which the rate 
of flow is varied by controls external to the pump. This control is 
achieved by a torque motor controlled servo which varies pump displace¬ 
ment. The pressure developed it only that required by system loading plus 
line losses. This system wee chosen to eliminate heat generation inherent 
in systeam using a pressure compensated pump at anything lasa than full 
load. 


42 


Single-Point Hoist Control System - Mechanical Paw 




A power takeoff shaft is used to drive the hoist. A clutch-reverser unit 
mounted on the accessory gearbox enables the hoist to raise or lower the 
load. It also permits disengagement of the power source at which time the 
load brake in the hoist maintains the cable position. 

« The clutch-reverser unit is similar to the types widely used in marine 

applications in small power boats. It utilizes oil-actuated, multiple* 
disc clutches. The oil is supplied at 250 pai by an accessory gearbox 
mounted pump. Appropriate solenoid operated valves direct the flow of oil 
to the proper clutch. 

41 

Two-Point Holst Control System - Hydraulic Power Source 

A single pump mounted on the accessory gearbox supplies the hoist motors. 
The hydraulic system is a pressure demand type in which the rate of flow 
is established by controls external to the pump and the pressure is deter¬ 
mined by the line losses and the load. It is a closed system with a pump 
supercharge of 50-100 psi. Fluid from the pump is delivered to the appro¬ 
priate subsystem and is then returned directly to the pump inlet. A sepa¬ 
rate replenishment pump system supplies fluid to replace that lost from 
the closed hoist system due to pump and motor leakage and bypass cooling 
flow. It also provides pressure for pump control. 

A feedback control system is used to provide synchronized lifting. This 
system is described schematically in Figure 11, page 44. The division of 
flow between the forward and aft hoists is established by servo controlled 
flow dividers. The signal to the flow dividers is derived from a compari¬ 
son of the signals from rotary potentiometers mounted on each hoiat. 
Operation of a single hoist is accomplished by supplying a bias signal to 
the flow dividers to block flow to one of the hoists. Clutches are pro¬ 
vided to disengage the potentiometers from the hoists during beeping and 
are reengaged for collective operation. This enables the cables to be ad¬ 
justed for any extremes in cargo shape and then permits the established 
cable lengths to be maintained during collective operation. This system 
eliminates errors due to differences in motor efficiency and initial set¬ 
tings of the divider valves. The maximum error is estimated to be in the 
order of 3-7/8 inches in 50 feet. 

, It will be possible to deenergize the feedback system during the initial 

stages of hoisting, thus permitting the basic system, which ia inherently 
load equalizing, to equalize loads on the cables automatically. This 
method of hoisting is feasible only if the lifting points are located sym¬ 
metrically about the center of gravity (C.G.) of the load. If the C.G. ia 

« not symmetrically located, the vehicle could assume an unsafe attitude. 

Consider, for example, a vehicle with its C.G. located at a point 40 pet 
of distance between the pickup points to be lifted with 30 feet of cable 
extended. The vehicle would then assume a nose-down attitude of 43° when 
the cable lengths were adjusted to maintain equal cable loads. Figure 12, 
page 46, shows resultant load attitude, with varying C.G. locations, re¬ 
sulting from the use of an automatic cable load equalizing feature. Thera- 


43 










fore, in the lifting operation of the above example it is desirable to keep 
the feedback system energized to maintain a level attitude of the load. 

Two-Point Holst Control System - Mechanical Power Source 

Power takeoff shafts are used to drive the hoists. A clutch-reverser unit 
mounted on the accessory gearbox enables the hoist to raise or lower the 
load. A separate clutch is used to disengage the single-point hoist, and 
clutches are used to disengage either the forward or aft hoists as re¬ 
quired. 

Synchronized operation is attained by engaging both forward and aft 
clutches and then engaging the clutch-reverser unit. This operation is 
automatically sequenced so that only one control motion will be required. 

Equal cable loading is attained by disengaging the clutch driving the 
heavily loaded hoist and allowing its load brake to maintain the load 
while operating the lightly loaded hoist until equal cable loads are 
attained. Load indicators will make it possible to determine when equal 
loading is obtained. A more elaborate feedback system, utilizing the out¬ 
put of the load cells, could be devised to accomplish automatic load 
equalizing. Development of such a system is feasible but probably not 
warranted, since, by operating the hoists individually and using the load 
indicators to equalize cable loads, the same result can be obtained with 
considerably less complication. 

Four-Point Holst Control System - Hydraulic Power Source 

In one of the separate function systems investigated, incorporating single- 
and four-point hoists, a single pump mounted on an accessory gearbox 
supplies the hydraulic power to both. The systems will be isolated from 
each other and from the pump by electrically operated shutoff valves. 

For the hydraulically powered combined function systems, a 68 gpm, 3500 psi 
pump is the source of power. Two of the separate function systems that 
utilize mechanical drives to the single-point hoist require a 45 gpm, 3500 
psi pump as a power source for the hydraulically driven multi-point system. 

The hydraulic system is a pressure demand type in which the rate of flow 
is established by controls external to the pump and the pressure is deter¬ 
mined by the line losses and the load. It is a closed system with a pump 
supercharge of 50-100 psi. Fluid from the pump is delivered to the appro¬ 
priate subsystem and then returned directly to the punp inlet. A ~*parate 
replenishment pump supplies fluid to replace that lost from the closed 
system due to pump and motor leakage and bypass cooling flow and also pro¬ 
vides pressure for pump control. A feedback control system is used to pro¬ 
vide synchronized lifting, This system is described schematically in 
Figure 13. The division of flow between forward and aft hoists and between 
port and starboard hoists is established by servo controlled flow dividers. 
The signal from the flow dividers is derived from a comparison of the 
signals from the rotary potentiometers mounted on each hoist. Two poten¬ 
tiometers are mounted on each of the starboard hoists, and only one will be 
mounted on each of the port hoists. The first potentiometer on the star- 

45 





(% DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS) 


Figure 12, Multi-Point Hoist - Equalised 
Load Systao, Cargo Attitude vs 
C.G, Location. 


46 



board hoists controls the division of flew between the two forward and the 
two aft hoists. The second potentiometer on the port and starboard hoists 
controls the distribution of flow between the two port and the two star¬ 
board hoists. Operation of the hoists individually (beeping) is accom¬ 
plished by supplying a bias signal to the two relevant flow dividers, 
blocking flow to three of the hoists. 

• Clutches disengage the feedback potentiometers from the hoists during 
beeping operation and reengage for collective operation. This enables the 
cables to be adjusted for any extremes in cargo shape and then permits the 
established cable lengths to be maintained during collective operation. 
This system eliminates errors due to differences in motor efficiency and 
initial settings of the divider valves. The maximvm error is estimated 

to be in the order of 7-3A inches in 50 feet (see Error Analysis, page 
148). 

By deenergizing the feedback system during the initial stages of hoisting, 
the cable loads are automatically equalized, since the basic system is in¬ 
herently load equalizing. Figure 12, page 46, shows the resultant load 
attitude with varying C.G. locations if an automatic load equalizing 
system is used. 

Four-Point Holst Control System - Mechanical Power Source 

A clutch-reverser unit mounted on the accessory gearbox provides power to 
both the single- and four-point hoists. Clutches mounted on angle gear¬ 
boxes adjacent to each of the hoists permit individual operation as re¬ 
quired. A separate clutch is used to disengage the single-point hoist 
during operation in the four-point mode. 

Synchronized operation is attained by engaging the four-point hoist 
clutches and then engaging the clutch-reverser unit. This operation is 
automatically sequenced so that only one control motion will be required. 

Equal cable loading is attained by disengaging the clutch driving the 
heavily loaded hoist and allowing its load brake to maintain the load 
while operating the lightly loaded hoists until equal cable loading is 
attained. Load indicators will make it possible to determine when equal 
loading is obtallied. 

. Since this system is awkward to use effectively, it would be desirable to 

incorporate a feedback system to give load equalization automatically. 

Such a system utilizee the output of the load cells to supply a control 
signal to the proper clutches. This signal permits clutch slippage until 
equalized loading is attained. A temperature sensor in the separate 

• clutch units would provide protection against overheating by locking up the 
clutch to prevent excessive heat buildup. 


47 


| 

l 


I 

I 

i 

i 

i 

Vi 

•ft 


K 

r' 

•I. 

r. 


-*-n v n>>~ 


FOUR- 


POINT 


HOISTS 


FLOW 

DIV 


FLOW 

DIV 


r \ 

f \ 

f \ 

r \ 

FLOW 


MF 

MF 

MF 

(mf 

DIV 

L _^ — 

111 1 


—0—i—O— f!_ 




REPLENISHMENT 

PUMP 





MAIN 

HOIST 


HOIST PUMP 


Figure 13* Hydraulic Schematic - Single - 
Flue Four-Point Suspension. 


48 




ISOLATORS 


> 

I 


tf 

i 





Isolators are required on all hoists to eliminate the vertical bounce 
phenomena (see page 107 for a discussion of vertical bounce). 

The isolators are of the hydraulic cylinder type similar to that used on 
the CH-54A main cargo hoist. This type of isolator incorporates an 
isolator, a load cell, shock struts, and a charging cylinder in one unit. 
The shock struts serve to retard the return stroke of the isolator when 
loads are air dropped. The charging cylinder which is pressurized by the 
aircraft utility hydraulic system compensates for temperature induced 
pressure changes in the isolator and makes up for any leakage that may 
occur. 

When applied to cargo hoists of conventional design, the isolator reacts 
the cable load through a linkage. On zero-moment hoists, it is mounted 
directly in line with the cable so that no linkages are required. 


HOIST CABLES 


Background 

The main cargo hoist used on the CH-54A has one of the largest capacities 
in existence. It is capable of raising and lowering a 15,000-pound load 
at 45 feet per minute and has a static lift rating of 20,000 pounds. A 
7/8 diameter (.923 actual) nonrotating cable of 18 x 7 construction with 
individual wires .058 inch in diameter is used to support the load. The 
core of the cable contains seven electrical conductors wrapped in a re¬ 
silient Teflon jacket. The electrical conductors are used to operate the 
hook indicator lights and to power a solenoid which opens the hook. The 
cable has a minimum breaking strength of 58,000 pounds. The cable is 
wrapped on a drum whose basic pitch diameter is 24.5 inches, which gives 
a drum to cable wire diameter ratio of 422 to 1. The drum is magnesium 
to *hich a 0.25-inch-thick polyurethane rubber jacket is molded. The 
nibber Jacket serves to reduce chafing, thus prolonging both drum and 
cable life. Experience with this hoist in the Southeast Asian theatre of 
operations for 11 months has not resulted in a single cable fatigue 
failure. 

Single-Point Hoist Cable Design 

To meet the 40,000-pound single-point hoist capability of the H.L.H., it 
will be necessary to use a cable diameter of 1.39 inches. An 18 x 19 con¬ 
struction is used to obtain a flexibility greater than that of the 18 x 7 
■* construction used on the CH-54A. 

Normal nonrotating cable construction requires the use of 18 strands of 
wire with either 7, 19, or 37 wires in each strand. Therefore, cable 
flexibility is increased by using a larger number of smaller diameter 
wires in each strand rather than by increasing the number of strands. The 
18 x 19 construction cable uses a wire diameter of 0.060 inch compared to a 
I 

49 

1 

I 

I 











wire diameter of 0.058 inch in the 18 x 7 cable. Using commercial prac¬ 
tice (for cables without conductors in the core) which requires a cable 
drum diameter 400 times the individual wire diameter, it would be possible 
to use a cable drum diameter of 24 inches. Use of 18 x 7 construction 
cable with 7 wires of .065 diameter per strand would, by the 400 to 1 rule, 
require a minimum cable drum diameter of 34 inches. 

While the drum diameter selected is greater than the 24 inch minimum allow¬ 
able, the extra flexible construction has been retained, since it increases 
the fatigue life of the cable. The determining factor in selection of the 
drum diameter is the requirement to carry as much cable as possible with¬ 
out exceeding desirable aircraft control limitations (see Single-Point 
Hoist section, page 17) rather than the minimum ratio of cable drum to 
wire diameter (the 400 to 1 rule). 

Multi-Point Hoist Cable Design 

For the 23, 100 -pound-capacity two-point hoists, a 1.06 diameter cable is 
required, and a 0.79 diameter cable is required for the 11,550-pound-capac¬ 
ity four-point hoists. All cables are stainless steel and are of 18 x 19 
nonrotating construction. Wire size for 1.06 diameter cable is .047 and 
is *Q35 for the .79 diameter cable. The use of nonrotating construction 
in all of the multi-point hoists is desirable, since it will permit them to 
carry separate cargo on individual hoists. The four hoists, for example, 
could be rigged to cany separate fuel bags, or sling loads of amnunition, 
to individual sites. All cables will contain seven electrical conductors 
suitably protected by a resilient Teflon jacket in the central core. This 
construction provides the maximal protection for the conductors from both 
the elements and from damage due to rough handling. 

No development problems are expected in the fabrication of ary of the 
three cables described above. 

The one major development problem to be solved is that of providing a cock¬ 
pit controlled mechanical release of the load that can be integrated with 
the load suspension cables. Several proposed solutions to this problem 
and an alternate method of providing the needed redundancy in release 
methods are described in the PROBLEM AREAS AND PROPOSED SOLUTIONS section, 
page 113. 


CARGO HOOKS 


Background 

Cargo hooks used by helicopters for support of external loads have under¬ 
gone extensive development since the original manually released hooks were 
first introduced. Capacities have increased from 2000 pounds to the 
20,000 pound capacity hook presently used in both the CH-53A and the CH-54A. 
Electrical release modes have been added and the automatic touchdown re¬ 
lease has been developed. Indicator lights for load beam attitude also 
have been added. 












Table XV shows the weight trend of cargo hooks presently in use. It should 
be noted that the hooks rated at 20,000 vary in weight by 27.2 pounds, with 
the hoist mounted hook being heavier. This increase in weight is due 
solely to the requirement for a swivel-slip ring assembly and not for 
other reasons such as cable straightening requirements. 

Heavy Lift Helicopter Cargo Hook Design 

To meet the cargo hooks requirements for hoists of this study, the basic 
data shown in Table XVI, page 53, were generated and design proposals were 
solicited from several manufacturers of airborne cargo hooks. 


TABLE XV 

HELICOPTER CARGO HOOKS 


Aircraft 

Type of 
Suspension 

Normal 
Operating 
Load (lb) 

Ultimate 
Load (lb) 

Weight 

(lb) 

Conroe nts 

H-34 

Sling 

5,000 

25,000 

10.7 


H-37 

Sling 

10,000 

50,000 

27 

Requires manual 
relatch 

CH-3C 

Sling 

10,000 

50,000 

24 


CH-53A 

Pipe 

20,000 

90,000 

40 


CH-54A 

Hoist 

20,000 

90,000 

67.2 

Requires swivel- 
slip ring assy 


Proposals received from hook manufacturers indicate that all these require¬ 
ments can be met with no major advances being required in the state of the 
art. The weight of the 40,000-pound-capacity hook swivel assembly will be 
192 pounds, that of the 23j 100-pound unit will be 87 pounds, and the 11,550- 
pound unit will be 59 pounds. All units will be similar in design to the 
assembly presently in use on the CH-54A, shown in Figure 14, page 51. It 
is the opinion of one hook manufacturer that the weight of the 40,000-* 
pound-capacity unit can be significantly reduced by a change in the rela¬ 
tionship of the structural parts. Such a change will be actively pursued 
in Phase II of this study. 

Field experience with the CH-54A has borne out the fact that the swivel- 
slip ring assembly is the most sensitive part of the total hook assenfcly to 
environmental conditions. Such assemblies must be designed to provide the 
utmost protection from the elements. In addition, they must be nigged 
enough to withstand repeated abuse. Environmental testing is mandatory to 
ensure that the required protection has been provided. A refinement, 
currently being studied under a separate contract, is the incorporation of 
an AN 4064 type dehydrator for both the hook and swivel-slip ring assemblies. 


52 


TABLE XVI 

BASIC DATA - CARGO HOOKS 


GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

1. Open throat design of hook 

2. Automatic relatch of load beam 

3. No safety lock 

4. Both manual and electrical release modes required 

5. Swivel-slip ring assembly required to allow hook rotation* 

6. Slip ring to have 7 circuits 

7® Design life: 5000 full load releases • 

6. Indicator signals for hook open and hook closed 

9. Environment: -65°F to 130°F, sand and duet, fungus, 
water immersion 

10. Hook detachable from swivel; swivel detachable from 
cable 

11, Hook supported by a single cable with hollar core for 
electrical and/or mechanical conductors. 


Capacity 



A 

B 

C 

Cable Size 

1.39 

1.06 

0.79 

Max. Operating 
Load 

40,000 

23,100 

11,550 

Limit Load 

100,000 

64,700 

32,350 

Ultimate Load 

150,000 

97,000 

48,500 


*Swivel assembly, combined with nonrotating cable construction, 
permits individual loads to be carried on multi-point hoist 
systems (see page 50). 


53 






This will provide field-level personnel with a method to check for mois¬ 
ture contamination without disassembly. 


MTSTKI.T-AMBnus COMPONENTS 
PiRtch Degign 

All hoist distribution clutches are of the multiple-disc, wet-plate type. 
They will be either hydraulically or electrically actuated. They are 
spring loaded to the disengaged position. The clutches are mounted on 
the angle gearboxes and are easily removable. 

Traction Sheaves 

All traction sheaves will be hydraulically powered and universally mounted. 
The power required to drive the sheaves was established by assuming a mini¬ 
mal cable sag of 1 inch in 19 inches of span and a requirement that the 
sheave operate at a speed 5 pet above that of the hoist during the lowering 
mode of operation. Driving friction of the cable in the sheave is assured 
by the use of adjustable pressure rollers. A slip clutch is used in series 
with the motor. The clutch will be imnersed in oil to permit proper cool¬ 
ing during operation. 

The sheave will be removable} both the cable cutters and the bellmouth will 
be slotted to permit installation and removal of the cable. Tandam-dual 
cable cutters are mounted on the bellmouth. The use of pressure rollers 
and a cover for the sheave provides an effective backlash suppressor in 
the event that the cables must be sheared. A typical design is shown in 
figure 15, page 55. 

Cable Cutters 

All cable cutters are of the tandem-dual type presently installed on the 
four-point hoists being developed for uso on the CH-54A. 

Two cable cutters of the electrically ignited, explosively propelled knife 
type are mounted in tandem on both hoist and traction sheave bellmouths. 
Each cutter's explosive charge can be fired by either of the two bridge- 
wire circuits. Separate routing of the wiring for each of the circuits 
provides additional redundancy. All firing circuits are actuated simul¬ 
taneously. Attachment of the cable cutters to the bellmouth will permit 
easy tear-out in the event that the lower cutter should trap the cable in 
the housing instead of shearing it. 

All hoists incorporate the tandem-dual cable cutter concept to meet emer¬ 
gency release requirements. Since the circuitry required to fire the 
cable cutters bypasses the hoist and hook slip ring assemblies as well as 
the load suspension cable, this concept meets all requirements for a re¬ 
dundant release system. All wiring to the cutters will be Installed with 
adequate slack to allow free hoist movement and will be armored to pro¬ 
tect from accidental, damage. 


54 
















HYDRAULIC 
MOTOR INPUT 


SLIP CLUTCH 



SLIP RING 
ASSEMBLY 






The "all-fire" current will not exceed 16 amperes per hoist. Thus the 
emergency release system can be operated on battery power only in the 
event of the failure of both aircraft generators. 

Conductor Reels 


A conductor reel is required in several of the combined function config¬ 
urations investigated to provide a method of supplying electrical power 
to the 40,000-pound-capacity cargo hook. In addition, the conductor reel 
is used to stow the hook out of the way when it is not in use. 

The basic design will consist of a hydraulically powered hoist capable of 
storing 150 feet of electrical conduit. The conduit will have 7 electri¬ 
cal conductors in the core and will be suitably protected by a braided 
wire jacket. A slip ring assembly will transmit electrical power from the 
aircraft system to the electrical conduit. The use of a flat coil spring 
to provide power for reeling in was not considered feasible because of the 
150 foot length of cable required. A 1.0-horsepower hydraulic motor driv¬ 
ing through a slip clutch will permit the hook to be lowered without slack. 

The motor, which will be synchronized to operate with the hoists, will also 
operate at a speed such that no slack will be permitted in the cable during 
lifting. The slip clutch will prevent the electrical conduit from lifting 
more than the hook weight alone and will permit the hook to be lifted into 
a storage well when not in use. 

The conduit will be attached by means of its steel braided outer jacket to 
the swivel assembly of the hook with a suitable electrical connector to 
provide electrical power. 

While such a unit is not comnercially available at the present time, de¬ 
sign and fabrication will present no major technical problems. Its weight 
should not exceed 50 pounds. A typical design is shown in Figure 16, 
page 57. 


59 


HOIST SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 


Thirteen basic hoist system configurations have been investigated to meet 
the heavy lift helicopter external cargo handling requirements. Seven con¬ 
figurations are designed to meet the single- plus four-point requirements 
and six are designed to meet the single- plus two-point requirements. 

Three variants of each type are combined function arrangements with the 
single-point function being replaced by combined operation of the multi¬ 
point hoists. Tables XVII and XVIII, pages 87 and 8$ include a brief 
description and summary of pertinent data on each system. Schematic 
drawings of all the systems are presented in Figures 17 through 29, pages 
61 through 85 . The weights given are based on 60 feet of cable for the 
single-point hoist. 




60 





-1 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single-point hoist mechanically driven. Hydraulically powered 
zero-moment hoists for the four-point system. 

System Components and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) I960 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 124 

Angle Gearboxes (2 required) 43 

Drive Shafts 6 

Hoist Pump 35 

Four-Point Hoist (Type K, 4 required) 2000 

Hydraulic Motor (4 required) 40 

Plumbing and oil 188 

Total System Weight 4396 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove four-point hoists) 2396 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove single-point hoist) 2436 Pounds 

Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 94.8 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 84.8 HP 


Figure 17 


-1 Configuration 



CLUTCH-REVERSER UNIT- 



A. 




-2 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single-point hoist hydraulically powered by one or two motors. 
Hydraulically powered zero-moment hoists for the four-point system. 


System Compor.ents and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) 

I960 Pounds 

Four-Point Hoist (Type K) 

2000 

Hydraulic Pump 

55 

Hydraulic Motors (5 required) 

84 

Plumbing and Oil 

188 

Total System Weight 

4287 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 


(Remove four-point hoists) 

2287 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 


(Remove single-point hoist 

2327 Pounds 


Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 132.5 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 84.8 HP 


> 


* 


Figure 18, -2 Configuration. 



63 












-3 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single- and four-point hoists mechanically driven. 
System Components and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) I960 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 124 

Angle Gearboxes (4 required) 80 

Clutches (5 required) • 51 

Shafts and Couplings 45 

Four^-Point Hoists (Type P, 4 required) 1952 

Total System Weight 4213 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove four-point hoists) 2261 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove single-point hoist) 2253 Pounds 

Powered Require^ 

Single-Point Mission 94,2 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 58,0 HP 


* 


Figure 19. -3 Configuration, 






65 







-4 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single-point hoist mechanically driven. Two mechanically driven 
dual drum hoists, with cables reeved over hydraulically powered 
traction sheaves for the four-point system. 


System Components and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) I960 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 124 

Angle Gearboxes (2 required) 42 

Shafts and Couplings 29 

Dual Drum Hoist (Type N, 2 required) 1980 

Traction Sheaves 240 

Clutches (5 required) 55 

Total System Weight 4430 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove dual drum hoists) 2450 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove single-point hoist) 2470 Pounds 

Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 94.1 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 64.9 HP 


Figure 20. -4 Configuration. 

67 


iiW' 










TRACTION SHEAVES 



STA 

694 









-5 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered zero-moment hoists 
for the four-point system with a frame, lockable to the aircraft 
to provide single-point capability. 


System Components and Weights 

Four-Point Hoists (Type M, 4 required) 2200 Pounds 


Hydraulic Pump 35 

Frame (with slings & 40,000-lb hook) 1172 

Plumbing and Oil 188 

Hydraulic Motors (4 required) 88 

Conductor Reel 50 

Total System Weight 3733 Pounds 

Single-iPoint Mission Weight 3733 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove frame with slings & hook) 2561 Pounds 


Power Require d 

Single-Point Mission 

Multi-Point Mission 171.8 HP 


BL — 
70 

l 

\ 


Bl 

70 


WL * — 
260 

WL- 

230 



WL 

50 


Figure 21 


-5 Configuration 













-6 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered zero-moment hoists 
with cables joined to a common hook for a single-point capability 

and reeved over hydraulically powered traction sheaves for the g L 

four-point system. 7 ( 

System Components and Weights 


Four-Point Hoist (Type L, 4 required) 

2200 Pounds 

Hydraulic Pump 

35 

Traction Sheaves 

240 

Hydraulic Motors (4 required) 

88 

Conductor Reel 

50 

Hook and Swivel ( 40 , 000 -lb Capacity) 

190 

Plumbing and Oil 

188 

Total System Weight 

2991 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

2991 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 


(Remove hook, swivel,& 


conductor reel) 

2751 Pounds 


Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 

Multi-Point Mission 179.1 HP 


WL — 
260 

I 


WL 

50 


Figure 22, -6 Configuration, 


A. 


71 







.tv--.' 


-7 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered zero-moment hoists 
for the four-point system. Cables joined by a master hook 
carried by one of the four-point i o Bts to provide single-point 
capability. 


System Components and '//eights 

Four-Point Hoists (Type L, 4 required) 2200 Pounds 

Hydraulic Pump 35 

Hydraulic Motor 88 

Plumbing and Oil 188 

Hook and Swivel (40,000-lb Capacity) 192 

Conductor Reel 50 


Total System Weight 

Single-Point Mission Weight 
Multi-Point Mission Weight 


2753 PoundB 

2753 PouniB 
2753 Pounds 


Power Required 


Single-P.iint Mission 
Multi-Point Mission 


171.8 HP 


Figure 23. -7 Configuration, 


73 



ACCESSORY GEARBOX 




4 









-11 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single-point mechanically driven. Hydraulically powered zero- 
moment hoists for the two^point system. 


System Components and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) 

I960 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 

124 

Two-Point Hoist (Type G, 2 required) 

2004 

Hydraulic Motors (2 required) 

44 

Angle Gearboxes (2 required) 

43 

Hydraulic Pump 

35 

Shafts and Couplings 

6 

Plumbing and Oil 

174 

Structure 

40 

Total System Weight 

4430 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove two-point hoists) 

2426 Pound8 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove single-point hoists) 

2470 Pounds 

Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 

94.0 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 

86.3 HP 


Figure 24. -11 Configuration. 


75 


A* 








-13 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single- and two-point hoists mechanically driven. 


System Components and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) I960 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 124 

Two-Point Hoists (T^pe F, 2 required) 2044 

Angle Gearboxes (4 required) 83 

Shaft and Couplings 45 

Clutches (3 required) 48 

Structure 40 


Total System Weight 


4344 Pounds 


Single-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove two-point hoists) 2300 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove single-point hoist) 2384 Pounds 


Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 94.0 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 61.1 HP 


Figure 25. -13 Configuration 



-13 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single- and two-point hoists mechanically driven. 


System Components and Weights 


Single-Point Hoist (Type A) I960 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 124 

Two-Point Hoists (Tjrpe F, 2 required) 2044 

Angle Gearboxes (4 required) $3 

Shaft and Couplings 45 

Clutches (3 required) 48 

Structure 40 


Total System Weight 


4344 Pounds 


Single-Point Mission Weignt 

(Remove two-point hoists) 2300 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

(Remove single-point hoist) 2384 Pounds 



Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 94.0 HP 

Multi-Point Mission 61.1 HP 


WL- 

260 

WL —- 
230 


WL 

50 


Figure 25. -13 Configuration. 


A. 


77 





-14 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

Single-point hoist is a dual drum type mechanically driven. 
Cables are reeved over hydraulically powered traction sheaves 
for the two-point system. 


System Components and Weights 


Dual Drum Single-Point Hoist ('^’ype D) 2138 Pounds 
Clutch-Reverser Unit 124 

Hook and Swivel (40,OOO-lb Capacity) 192 

Traction Sheaves (2 required) 120 

Conductor Reel 50 

Clutches (2 required) 32 

Angle Gearboxes (2 required) 36 

Shafts and Couplings 6 

Plumbing and Oil 24 

Structure 40 


Total System Weight 


2762 Pounds 


Single-Point Mission Weight 2762 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 
(Remove 40,000-lb 

capacity hook) 2570 Pounds 



Power Required 


Single-Point Mission 
Multi-Point Mission 

WL- 

230 


90.6 HP 
63.8 HP 



V 


WL 

50 


Figure 26. -14 Configuration. 











-15 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered zero-moment hoists 
for the two-point system with a beam, lockable to the aircraft, 
tc provide single-point capability. 


System Components and Weights 


Two-Point Hooks (Type H, 2 required) 

2144 Pounds 

Suspension Beam with Hook & Slings) 

1106 

Conductor Keel 

50 

Hydraulic Pump 

55 

Hydraulic Motors (2 required) 

44 

Plumbing and Oil 

174 

Structure 

40 

Total System Weight 

3613 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

3613 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 


(Remove beam with hook & slings) 

2507 Pounds 

Renuired 


Single-Point Mission 


Kulli-Point Mission 

174.8 HP 


WL- 

260 

WL—- 

230 



WL 

50 


Figure 27. -15 Configuration. 



81 



ACCESSORY 


CONDUCTOR 

REEL 


GEARBOX —' 

HYDRAULIC PUMP 


sta 

406 


S' 


5: 


\ 


zf 


'kztt f 


£ 










-17 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

No single-point hoist. Mechanically powered conventional 
hoists with cable joined to a coraaon hook to provide single - 


point capability. 


System Components and Weigh* s 


Two-Point Hoists (Type F, 2 required) 

2144 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 

124 

Angle Gearboxes (4 required) 

60 

Shafts ar.i Couplings 

38 

Clutches (2 required) 

32 

Conductor Reel 

50 

Hook and Swivel (40,000-lb Capacity) 

192 

Structure 

40 

Total System Weight 

2680 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

2680 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 


(Remove 40,000-lb capacity hook) 

2488 Pounds 


Power Required 

Single-Point Mission 

Multi-Point Mission 123.9 HP 


Figure 28. -17 Configuration 















-18 CONFIGURATION 


General Description 

No single-point hoist. Mechanically powered conventional hoists 
with cables reeved over hydraulically powered traction sheaves 
and joined to master hook for single-point capability. 


System Components and Weights 


Two-Point Hoists (Type F, 2 required) 

2144 Pounds 

Clutch-Reverser Unit 

124 

Traction Sheaves (2 required) 

120 

Hook and Swivel (40,000-lb Capacity) 

192 

Angle Gearboxes (4 required) 

50 

Shafts and Couplings 

40 

Clutches (2 required) 

16 

Plumbing and Oil 

6 

Structure 

40 

Total System Weight 

2732 Pounds 

Single-Point Mission Weight 

2732 Pounds 

Multi-Point Mission Weight 

2732 Pounds 

Powered Required 


Single-Point Mission 

— 

Multi-Point Mission 

125,1 HP 


Figure 29 -18 Configuration. 



CLUTCH -REVERSER UNIT 



CLUTCHES 







TABLE XVII 


SUMMARY 

SINGLE-POINT PLUS FOUR-POINT 
LOAD SUSPENSION CONFIGURATIONS 


Config, 

Number 

Description 

Total 

System 

Weight* 

(lb) 

Drive 

Hoi 

Typ 

-1 

Single-point hoist mechanically driven. Hydrau¬ 
lically powered zero moment hoists for the four- 
point system. 

4396 

Mech. 

Con 

-2 

Single-point hoist hydraulically powered by one 
or two motors. Hydraulically powered zero- 
moment hoists for the four point system. 

4287 

Hyd. 

Con 

-3 

Single- and four-point hoists mechanically 
driven. 

4213 

Mech. 

Cor 

-4 

Single-point hoist mechanically driven. Two 
mechanically driven, dual drum hoists with 
cables reeved over hydraulically powered 
traction sheaves for the four-point system. 

4430 

Mech. 

Con 

-5 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered zero- 
moment hoists for the four-point system with a 
frame, lockable to the aircraft, to provide 
single-point capability 

3733 


— 

-6 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered 
zero-moment hoists with cables joined to a 
common hook for single point capability and 
reeved over hydraulically powered traction 
sheaves for the four-point system. 

2991 



-7 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered 

2753 

- 

- 


zero-moment hoists for the four-point system, 
t Cables joined by a master hook carried by one 

of the four-point hoists to provide single¬ 
point capability. 


*Add 103 pounds for single-point hoist with 
Add 362 pounds for single-point hoist with 


87 







FOUR-POINT 

FIGURATIONS 



Single Point 



Four 

Point 



Cable 


System 


Cable 

Total 

System 

Hoist 

Length 

HP 

Weight* 

Hoist 

Length 

HP 

Weight 

Drive Type 

(«) 

Reqd 

(lb) Drive 


ift) 

Reqd 

(ft) 


Mech. 

Conv. 

80 

94.2 

2396 

Hyd. 

Zero 

Mom. 

50 

84.8 

2436 

Hyd. 

Conv. 

80 

132.5 

2287 

Hyd. 

Zero 

Mom. 

50 

84.8 

2327 

Mech. 

Conv. 

80 

94.2 

2261 

Mech. 

Conv. 

50 

58.0 

2233 

Mech. 

Conv. 

80 

94.1 

2450 

Mech. 

Dual 
Drum & 
Trac¬ 
tion 
Shelves 

50 

64 #9 

2470 

- 

— 

- 

•m 

3733 

Hyd. 

Zero 

Mom. 

80 

171.8 

2561 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2991 

Hyd. 

Zero 

Mom. 

80 

179.1 

2751 





2753 

Hyd. 

Zero 

80 

171.8 

2753 


Mom. 


hoist with 100 feet of cable 
hoist with 150 feet of cable 


£>. 


TABLE XVIII 


SUMMARY 

SINGLE-POINT PLUS TWO-POINT 
LOAD SUSPENSION CONFIGURATIONS 


m 

Config. 

Number 


Total 

System 

Weight* 

ilb) 

Hoist 

Drive Tyne 

m 

-11 

Single-point meciianically driven. Hydrauli¬ 
cally powered zero-mamsnt hoists for the two- 
point system. 

4430 

Mech. Conv. 


-13 

Single- and two^soint hoists mechanically 
driven. 

4344 

Mech. Conv. 


-14 

Single-point hoist a dual drum type mechani¬ 
cally driven. Cables reeved over hydrauli¬ 
cally powered traction sheaves for the two- 
point system. 

2762 

Mech. Dual 
Drum 


-15 

No single-point hoist. Hydraulically powered 
zero-moment hoists for the two-point system 
with a beam, lockable to the aircraft, to 
provide single-point capability. 

3613 



-17 

No single-point hoist. Mechanically powered 
conventional hoists with cables joined to a 
common hook to provide single-point capability. 

2680 

mm m, 


-18 

No eingle-point hoist. Mechanically powered 
conventional hoists with cables reeved over 
hydraulically powered traction sheaves and 
joined to a master hook for single-point 
capability. 

2732 

Hyd. Trac¬ 
tion 
Sheavi 


*Add 103 pounds for single-point hoist wit] 
Add 362 pounds for single-point hoist wit! 



89 




II 


WO-POINT 

FIGURATIONS 



Single Point 



Two Point 


Hoist 

Drive Type 

Cable 

Length HP 
(ft) Read 

System 

Weight* 

(lb) Drive 

Hoist 

-Sa?.s_, 

Cable Total 
Length HP 
(ft) Read 

System 

Weight 

(lb) 


Mech. Conv, 80 94.0 2426 


Mech. 

Conv. 

80 

94.0 

2300 

Mech. 

Dual 

Dm 

80 

90.6 

2762 

- 


- 

- 

3613 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2680 

Hyd. 

Trac- 



2732 


tion 
Sheave8 


Hyd. 

Zero 

50 

86.3 

2470 


Moo. 




Mech. 

Conv. 

50 

61.1 

2384 

Hyd. 

Trac¬ 

tion 

Sheaves 

- 

63.8 

2570 

Hyd. 

Zero 

80 

174.8 

2507 


Mom. 




Mech. 

Conv. 

88 

123.9 

2488 

Mech. 

Conv. 

92 

125.1 

2732 


nt hoist with 100 feet of cable 
nt hoist with 150 feet of cable 


B. 



LOAD ACQUISITION AND RELEASE 


SINGLE-POINT MODS 


The single-point mode offers the most versatile and safest method for ac¬ 
quiring and releasing external loads. It is equally adaptable to ground 
and hovering type pickups. Since the cargo hook is connected to the cable 
by means of a swivel assembly, there is little resistance to rotation of 
loads being lifted. Because of this feature, bulky loads will have to be 
carried below the main landing gear; less bulky loads may be snugged up as 
close as in any of the multi-point systems to permit higher forward speeds. 
The effect of oscillating loads on the stability of the aircraft is mini¬ 
mized, since the hoist is located close to the center of gravity of the 
aircraft. This is more fully discussed in the AIRCRAFT - LOAD INTERACTION 
section. Hovering pickup, by any of the methods requiring the use of a 
beam to convert the multipoint system to single point (as in the -5 and 
-15 configurations), will present inherent hazards to both ground crew and 
to vehicles during both pickup and release. Therefore, the use of these 
systems is not recommended. The physical size of the hook, which weighs 
192 pounds, will require that the vehicle sling be carried to the hook. 

A short leader line fran the sling will facilitate this type of hookup and 
enable the ground crewman to hook yp without having to climb to the top of 
the vehicle to make the connection. 

In-flight release of cargo will be possible by using the electrical hook 
release. Use of tandem-dual cable cutters (see page 54) will ensure that 
cargo can be jettisoned in the event of a malfunction of the electrical 
release. Normal load release will be made after the cargo is put on the 
ground. Four methods of load release are possible: two for the pilot and 
two for the ground crew. The pilot can open the hook either by the elec¬ 
trical release, or, in the event of emergency, by shearing the cable with 
the tandem-dual cable cutters. The ground crewman can open the hook with 
the manual release knob or can slide the load ring off the hook by re¬ 
tracting the keeper on the hook in the event of a malfunction of the 
manual load release. An automatic touchdown release, whereby the hook 
automatically opens when the cargo is put on the ground, can be incor¬ 
porated. This feature adds another release mode and provides greater re¬ 
dundancy. 

Towing by the single-point hoist requires the use of special equipment of 
the type used on the CH-54A (see Figure 30, page 92) if cable loads are 
expected to exceed 18,000 pounds. This limitation is detailed in the 
AIRCRAFT-LOAD INTERACTION section, page 96 . 

TWO-POINT MODE 

The two-point mode is adaptable to either ground or hovering pickups, de¬ 
pending primarily upon the type of terrain for the method to be used. 

Ground pickup offers the safest method and should be used whenever circum¬ 
stances permit. 


91 


' • - j -riT "nnwfwr. 




Figure 30. Special Tow Gear 



Two-point hovering pickups are inherently more risky them those made in 
the single-point mode. This is because of the possibility that upsetting 
loads could be transmitted to the aircraft if it should drift and cause 
one cable to become tight before the other was attached. This risk can be 
largely eliminated by reeling out enough cable to put the hooks on the 
ground with adequate slack to permit attachment to the cargo. Since the 
hooks weigh 87 pounds,leader lines from the cargo slings, or vehicle 
attachment points, will greatly facilitate hookup. These lines can be 
attached to the hooks instead of requiring the hooks to be carried to the 
attachment points. Lifting cargo with a C.G. located midway between pick¬ 
up points from a hovering attitude will be performed with the load sensi¬ 
tive control energized. When cable loads are equalized, the synchronized 
lift control will be engaged and the load can be snugged into position. 
Beeping (individual control of hoists) is available to allow control of 
cargo that has an asymetrical center of gravity. These control systems 
have been fully described in the HOIST SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS DESIGN section 
page 12. 

In-flight trimming of loads to compensate for the effects of the aero¬ 
dynamic drag can be attained by engaging the load sensitive control. The 
advisability of making such in-flight adjustment at other than hovering or 
at very low forward speed conditions is questionable. Preliminary analysis 
indicates that multi-point loads will assume a stable aerodynamic position 
for reasonably adjusted cable lengths at any given forward speeu. In¬ 
flight changeo in cable lengths may affect aircraft stability and tend to 
produce ptiching oscillations. Further evaluation utilizing wind tunnel 
tests is desirable to obtain qualitative data upon which the limitations 
or advisability can be based. 

Normal load release will consist of synchronized lowering of the load to 
the ground from either a hover or the landed position of the aircraft. 

After the cables are slackened, the hooks can be opened electrically by 
the pilot or manually by the ground crew. In the unlikely event of both 
electrical and manual release failure, a ground crewman can slide the 
load ring off the hook load beam by retracting the spring loaded keeper on 
the hook. In the event that no ground crewman is on-site, it will be 
necessary to keep a slight tension (a cable tension indicator is provided) 
on the cables to permit the load to pull off the hook in the electrical 
release mode. This is necessary since tho hook load beam is spring loaded 
for automatic relatching. As in the single-point mode, a tandem- dual 
cable cutter on each hoist will provide emergency release by shearing both 
cables. 

The addition of a cockpit controlled, manual hook release, if practical, 
will not permit safe in-flight jettisoning of loads by hook release. Only 
by the combination of electrical and manual hook release motion in the 
cockpit could this be considered as a possible method to be used. Even 
this combination of motions should not be considered as rn acceptable 
means of in-flight jettisoning, since malfunction of the hook unlocking 
mechanism could still occur. Only by use of the tandem-dual cable cutters 
mounted on the hoists can a safe in-flight load jettison be performed. 


93 


1 

f 

"i 

§ 


K 

I 

*'A 


j wa w i 1 . 





Tewing is feasible within the 24,000-pound capability of the aft hoist. 

It is not feasible to use both hoists for greater tow capabilities because 
of the difficulties of obtaining equal cable loads. 


FOUR-POINT MODE 


The four-point system is equally adaptable to ground or to hovering pickup. 
Ground pickup offers the safest method and should be used whenever circum¬ 
stances permit. As in the two-point mode, it should be standard procedure 
during hovering pickups to have the hooks on the ground with adequate 
slack in the cables to permit their attachment to cargo. Since the hooks 
weigh 59 pounds, it is possible to attach the hooks to vehicle pickup 
points without the use of leader cables which are required for both the 
single- and two-point systems. Use of leader cables may be desirable, 
however. 

Lifting cargo with a C.G. located midway between pickup points from hover¬ 
ing attitude would be performed with the load sensitive control energized. 
When cable loads are equalized, the synchronized lift control will be en¬ 
gaged and the load will be snugged into position. Beeping (individual con¬ 
trol of hoists) is available to allow control of cargo that has an asym¬ 
metrical center of gravity. Lifting cargo with a C.G. that is not sym¬ 
metrically located with respect to the pickup points could result in the 
cargo assuming an extreme angle with the ground (see Figure 12, page 46). 

In-flight trinming of loads to compensate for the effects of aerodynamic 
drag of the cargo can be attained by engaging the load sensitive control. 
The advisability of making such an adjustment, as more fully discussed on 
page 111, is questionable. Normal load release will consist of synchro¬ 
nized lowering of the load to the ground from either a hover or the landed 
position of the aircraft. After cable slack is observed, the hooks can be 
opened electrically by the pilot or manually by the ground crew. As in 
the two-point system, a ground crewman can slide the load ring off the 
hook load beam by retracting the spring loaded keeper on the hook in the 
event of failure of the other release systems. If no ground crewmen are 
available, it is necessary to keep some tension (a cable tension indicator 
is provided) on the cables to permit the load to pull off the hook when 
released from the cockpit. As in the single- and two-point systems, tan¬ 
dem-dual cable cutters provide emergency release. 

To achieve maximum safety, it is recommended that in-flight load release 
be accomplished by shearing the cables. It is not considered safe with 
present stage of the art release systems to attempt an electrical hook re¬ 
lease in flight because of the inherent risk if one or more hooks fail to 
open. 

Should one or more of the hooks fail to open, the entire load would be 
transferred to the cables supporting these hooks and could cause the air¬ 
craft to become uncontrollable. Since many loads to be carried may be 
well within the ultimate (failing) strength of one or more of the cables, 
it is not possible to assume cable failure as a backup release system. 


94 



In-flight release of any multi-point load should therefore be accomplished 
only by use of the tandem-dual cable cutters. 

Limited towing (12,000 pound maximum) can be accomplished by using the 
left rear hoist. Any method of towing requiring that two or more hoist 
cables be joined presents inherent load sharing problems. 


95 



AIRCRAFT - LOAD INTERACTION 


STABILITY OF SLUNG LOADS 

The stability of the load Is the major limitation on forward speed when 
carrying slung loads. An oscillating or spinning load can transmit periodic 
forces to the aircraft which are detrimental to performance and handling 
qualities. High density spherical or cube shaped loads* such as a cargo 
net filled with ammunition* are generally aerodynamically stable and do not 
Impose limitations on the aircraft. Leer density* nonsynmetrical loads* such 
as a helicopter fuselage* are aerodynamically unstable and require some type 
of stabilizing device. Stabilization can be accomplished by multi-point 
suspension or by use of a small parachute attached to the load through a 
swivel Joint. 

The major advantage of a multi-point suspension system is the restoring 
moment it generates when the load is displaced in yaw. With either the 
two- or four-point suspension system* pods can be pulled snug against the 
aircraft* thus completely eliminating the yaw divergence problems. This 
stability contribution of multi-point systems deteriorates as cable length 
increases. Figure 31* page 97, shows the change in static directional re¬ 
storing stability, , with cable length for both the two- and four- 
point systems with a typical load of 25*000 pounds. 

- W ft-lb per degree (23) 

where 

W is the load* pounds 

x is the longitudinal distance between cable attachment 
points* feet 

y is the lateral distance between cable attachment 
points* feet 

L is the vertical distance between the load and cable 
attachment point* feet 

At yaw divergence speed* the restoring torque of the system Just equals the 
unstable aerodynamic moment of the load. Figure 32* page 98, shows the 
variation of static directional stability of a helicopter fuselage with 
forward epeed when slung at various distances below the fuselage. It can 
be seen that the four-point system provides a benefit of 5 knots in for¬ 
ward speed over that of a two-point system. Beyond 60 knots* a stabilizing 
device would be mandatory* 


96 



CABLE LENGTH (FT) 


Figure 31• 


Restoring Moment for Two- 
snd Four-Point Suspension 
with 25j OOO-Pound Load, 








AIRCRAFT - LOAD INTERACTION 


STABILITT OF SLUMS LOADS 

The stability of the load is the major limitation on forward speed when 
carrying slung loads* An oscillating or spinning load can transmit periodic 
forces to the aircraft which are detrimental to performance and handling 
qualities* High density spherical or cube shaped loads, such as a cargo 
not filled with ammunition, are generally aerodynamically stable and do not 
impose limitations on the aircraft. Low density, nonsynnetrical loads, such 
as a helicopter fuselage, are aerodynamically unstable and require some type 
of stabilising device* Stabilisation can be accomplished by multi-point 
suspension or by use of a mall parachute attached to the load through a 
swivel joint. 

The major advantage of a multi-point suspension system is the restoring 
moment it generates when the load is displaced in yaw. With either the 
two- or four-point suspension system, pods can be pulled snug against the 
aircraft, thus completely eliminating the yaw divergence problems* This 
stability contribution of multi-point systems deteriorates as cable length 
increases. Figure 31, page 97, shows the change in static directional re¬ 
storing stability, Nw,, with cable length for both the two- and four- 
point systems with atypical load of 25,000 pounds. 

» W 3 ?) ft-lb per degree (23) 

where 

W ie the load, pounds 

x is the longitudinal distance between cable attachment 
points, feet 

y is the lateral distance between cable attachment 
points, feet 

L is the vertical distance between the load and cable 
attachment point, feet 

At yaw divergence speed, the restoring torque of the system just equals the 
unstable aerodynamic moment of the load* Figure 32, page 9&, shows the 
variation of static directional stability of a helicopter fuselage with 
forward speed when slung at various distances below the fuselage* It can 
be seen that the four-point system provides a benefit of 5 knots in for¬ 
ward speed over that of a two-j oint system* Beyond 60 knots, a stabilizing 
device would be mandatory* 


96 




CABLE LENGTH (FT) 


Figure 31 • 


Restoring Moment for TWo- 
and Four-Point Suspension 
with 25,000-Pound Load. 












Figure 32. Typical Yaw Divergence of 

25,000-Pound Helicopter Fuselage* 


98 


The loads considered as typical are listed in Table XIX, page 101. 
Although actual wind tunnel data are not available for these vehicles, it 
is felt that high density loads, such as the personnel carrier and the 
self-propelled mortar, will need some additional stabilisation in the 
single-point mode and none in either of the multi-point modes* Based on 
wind tunnel tests of store* made for the S-60 Flying Crane, the 5-ton 
wrecker will require a drag parachute for stabilisation at speeds of 100 
knots on all suspension systems. The 155 mm howitzer will require added 
stabilization in the single-point system and little, or none, on either 
of the multipoint systems. 


CENTER-OF-ORAVITY SHIFT 


None of the loads evaluated will present any C.G. problems for either the 
single- or tandem-rotor aircraft. For the single-rotor type, all C.G.'s 
are within the F.S. 526 to 574 allowable limits. With the exception of 
the 5-ton wrecker on the multi-point systems, all C.G.'s are at, or near, 
F.S. 550. In this case the ovarall C.G. is at F. S. 569 within allowable 
limits. Similarly, for the tandem-rotor type, all C.G.'s are within the 
F.S. 527 to 589 allowable limits. Except for the 5-ton wrecker on the 
multipoint systems,all C.G.'s are at F.S. 557. In this case the overall 
C.G. is at F.S. 576, which is within allowable limits. 


TOWING CAPABILITY 


Towing characteristics of the single-rotor aircraft were calculated with 
the aid of a computer program. Figure 33, page 10Q shows trim control 
settings for a zero skew angle (aircraft plane of symmetry parallel to and 
coincident with the direction of the tow force). Experience in towing with 
the RH-3A, and in particular pilot's consents, dictates maxi mum pitch and 
roll attitudes of -22° and + 10° respectively. Figure 33 indicates that 
there will be no difficulty in meeting the roll attitude requirement but 
that the pitch attitude restriction limits the maxima tow cable tension 
to 16,000 pounds. In this situation the cable angle, relative to the 
earth, is 6°, tow cable length is 475 feet, and altitude is 50 feet. 

Lateral and longitudinal control positions show adequate control margin; 
trim positions are such that the pilot can execute a recovery in case the 
tow cable is suddenly released. 

An increase in tew capability would be possible if special towing gear 
(see Figure 30, page 92) were fitted to the aircraft. This gear will move 
the tow cable reaction point further aft and is similar to that used on 
the CH-54A. 


99 




«>•** 




kUlwJHRaliiliP 






TOW FORCE - THOUSANDS OF LBS 


Figure 33 • Low-Speed Towing Characteristic! 

(Groat Weight 38 f OOO Pound#, C.G. 
at Sta. 550, Zero Skew Angle). 


100 





AIRCRAFT CONTROLLABILITI 


Neither the single- nor the tandem-rotor aircraft should experience any 
trim difficulties during load acquisition or normal load release with the 
single or multi-point systems. Figure 34, page 10^ shows trim control 
positions for the single-rotor type both with and without external loads. 

A parasite drag correction was made to the computer program for each load. 
No pitching moment corrections were made, as the lines of action of moment 
contributing forces are at, or very near, the aircraft C.G. The parasite 
drag corrections are in reasonable agreement with wind tunnel tests; 
estimated parasite drag corrections are shown in Table HI, 


TABLE XIX 

ESTIMATED PARASITE DRAG 


Item No. * 

_Vehicle_Parasite Drag (ft 2 ) 

38 

155 MM Howitzer 

18 

49 

Personnel Carrier 

16.7 

83 

5-Ton Wrecker 

49 

86 

Self-Propelled 

33 


Mortar 


♦Item number in Appendix I 


As shown in Figure 34, significant changes from the basic aircraft trim are 
required for some loads. If the load should be jettisoned, the aircraft 
would respond as if a sudden input were applied to the controls. Figures 
35 end 36, pages 103 and 104, are time history relationships to the aircraft 
equations of motion for the more adverse trim situations in Figure 34* 

The aircraft will rise rapidly after the self-propelled mortar is jetti¬ 
soned from a hovering attitude and at 60 knots forward speed, as shown in 
Figures 35 and 36. In both situations, a reduction in collective pitch is 
necessary to prevent an excessive rate of climb. 

Figures 37 and 38, pages 105 and 106, show that the most critical situations 
in pitch for jettisoning of the 5-ton wrecker are in hover and at 60 knots 
forward speed. As seen from these time histories, the pitch response is 
controllable with the automatic stabilization equipment engaged. Due to 
• the basic instability of the aircraft in pitch, jettisoning of the load 

with the automatic stabilization equipment off should be accompanied by a 
corrective control input. 


101 



CONTROL POSITION-DEGREES CONTROL POSITION-DEGREES 



40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 


GROSS WEIGHT-LB 



40000 500'''' 60000 70000 80000 


jROSS WEIGHT-LB 


Figure 34 • Trim Characteristics vs Gross 
Weight - Single Rotor. 


102 








4 


Pigure 35. 


8 12 16 20 
TIME-SECONDS 


Vertical Response to Release of 
Self-Propelled Mortar in Hover* 


103 




Uti 






4 


8 12 
TIME-SECONDS 


16 


Figure 36. 


Vertical Response to Release of 
Self-Propelled Mortar at 60 Knots. 




_ NO CONTROL INPUT 

_CONTROL INPUT AFTER 


SECOND 










TIME-SECONDS 


Figure 37. Pitch Response to Release of 
5“Ton Wrecker in Hover, 







Flgur* 38. Pitch Response to Release of 
5-Ton Wrecker at 60 Knote. 


106 











■fj 

Neither single- nor tandem-rotor aircraft should exhibit any adverse trim 
changes when reeling in, or out, the entire length of cable on the single¬ 
point hoist if cable travel limitations are kept within proper limits. In 
order to keep resulting stick motion equal to or less than that corre¬ 
sponding to values on the CH-54A, it is necessary to require the use of a 
double layer drum hoist if a 150-foot cable length is required. 


VHtTICAL OSCILLATION 


Divergent vertical oscillation (vertical bounce), potentially inherent in 
all heavy lift helicopters carrying external cargo, is dynamically a 
forced response of the aircraft's first fuselage mode and coupled cargo 
moae at one times main rotor (lp) excitation frequency. Although the air¬ 
craft's basic fuselage mode frequency may be well removed from its lp 
operating speed,the attachment of a relatively large load though a flexible 
suspension cable can shift the fuselage bending mode to within the lp 
ranje, as shown in Figure 39, page 108. 

Depending on the ratio of the load mass to that of the fuselage, the input 
parameters, and the amount of inherent system damping, the resulting fuse¬ 
lage response can vary from small, convergent, uncomfortable cockpit levels 
to amplitudes divergent to aircraft structural integrity. Therefore, it is 
necessary to analyze the coupled load suspension/fuselage bending mode 
characteristics and to incorporate positive control to decouple the first 
fuselage and load suspension modes. 

Dynamic decoupling is achieved in the heavy-lift helicopter by incorporat¬ 
ing an isolator with variable stiffness characteristics as a function of 
load, as shown in Figure 40, page 109. The isolator provides essentially 
constant first fuselage and load suspension vertical frequencies, both well 
separated from lp frequency excitation throughout the load application 
range (see Figure 41, page 110). These results were analyzed by using a 
Sikorsky Aircraft free vibration program on the IBM 7094 conputer using 
70 degrees of freedom, as shown in Figure 42, page 112. Vertical, longi¬ 
tudinal, and pitch motions are included in the programing analysis. 

The heavy lift helicopter isolator requirements of Figure 40 are similar 
to those of the CH-54A. The isolator on the CH-54A has been flight-tested 
and proven to be effective in providing the required dynamic decoupling. 
Therefore, a similar isolator configuration is planned for the heavy lift 
helicopter. 


i 


i 

\ 

\ 

f 


POD JETTISON 

In the event of an in-flight emergency, such as loss of one or more engines, 
it may be desirable to jettison a cargo loaded pod in order to increase the 
probability of effecting a safe emergency landing. Such a procedure is 
possible, when the pod is supported by the multi-point hoists, by shearing 
the cables. Preliminary analysis indicates that there should be no re¬ 
sulting pod pitching problems and that the pod should clear the tail cone 





107 





0 100 200 300 400 500 

£Um - CYCLES PER MINUTE 

Figure 39• Vertical Bounce Mode Frequencies 
vs Cable Length Without Decoupler. 


108 
















MAXIMUM SPRING RATE - THOUSANDS OF POUNDS PER IN 






CABLE LENGTH-FEET 


EXTERNAL LOAD RANGE 
10,000 LB TO 
40,000 LB 







on the single-rotor heavy lift helicopter. Whether the pod will clear the 
main landing gear is dependent on the landing gear design and aerodynamic 
forces and cannot be determined at this time. The interference effects 
between the pod and the fuselage are the major unknown factors and will 
have to be evaluated by wind tunnel testing before the use of in-flight 
jettisoning can be considered safe. 

A pod used to carry personnel requires the use of fixed fuselage pod locks 
to ensure that accidental in-flight jettisoning cannot occur. If the pod 
is used to carry cargo, it is desirable to permit in-flight jettisoning. 

Thus it is necessary to include provisions in the locks for an explosive 
bolt release. The use of replaceable nonexplosive bolts when carrying 
personnel and explosive bolts when carrying cargo would introduce a serious 
human factors problem. For this reason the use of explosive bolts in the 
fuselage pod locks would be undesirable, hence precluding ary possibility 
of in-flight jettisoning of the pod. 


IN-FLIGHT ADJUSTMENT OF MULTI-POINT HOISTS 


All multi-point systems have the capability of in-flight adjustment of one 
or more of the cable lengths. The advisability of making such in-flight 
adjustment at other than hovering or very la/ forward speed conditions is 
questionable. Preliminary analysis indicates that multi-point loads will 
assume a stable aerodynamic position for reasonably adjusted cable lengths 
at ary given forward speed. In-flight changes in cable lengths may affect 
aircraft stability and tend to produce pitching oscillations. Further 
evaluation utilising wind tunnel tests is desirable to obtain qualitative 
data upon which the limitations and/or advisability can be based. 


* 


111 


' 




f VERTICAL JEGREE OF FREEDOM 
P PITCH DE6REE OF FREEDOM 



H.L.H. PuMlAge MathflMtic*! Modal 



PROBLEM AREAS AND PROPOSED SOLUTIONS 


MECHANICAL LOAD RELEASE FROM COCKPIT 


One of the performance objectives of this study is to provide for two 
methods of cockpit controlled load release, electrical and mechanical. 

The mechanical release objective presents a major problem area. 

One approach is the incorporation of a hydraulic line in the central core 
of the cable. The electrical conductors would then be used to replace one 
of the outer strands of the cable. The conductors would be suitably pro¬ 
tected by wire braiding and would not support any of the loads. There 
would be no loss in strength of the cable, since, in the standard non¬ 
rotating construction, the outer layer of strands have substantially 
greater strength than the inner layer. Unfortunately, the size of the 
hydraulic line in the central core would, even with 3000 psi oil supply, 
give a relatively small output force. Leakage problems would have to be 
eliminated, and the added complexity required would probably negate the 
advantages expected by having a redundant hook release method. 

Another possibility is the use of a push-pull mechanical cable in the core 
with the electrical conductors woven into the outer strands as described 
above. Unfortunately, the smallest available size of the cable is 3/8 
diameter. Also, this type of cable does not lend itself to operation if 
it is forced to maintain a helical position. Considerable design and 
development work would have to be done in order to solve these two basic 
problems. 

A third approach is the use of a mechanical release line supported on a 
separate, constant tension cable drum. A hydraulic or electrical motor 
drive would provide the tension required for hook release. The mechanical 
release line would be attached to the hook. The primary problem to be 
expected is that of this line winding around the primary load suspension 
cable. A secondary problem is that of the line becoming entangled in the 
equipment to be hoisted. An added weight penalty would also be incurred, 
and system complexity would be increased. 

A fourth solution is the design of a cable strip-off feature. This fea¬ 
ture requires Incorporation of a clutch to let the load pull the cable off 
the drum. In addition, some protective device iB required to prevent the 
free falling load from overspeeding the gear train. While this approach 
offers the most feasible method of providing a redundant method of load 
release, controllable from the cockpit, it results in the lose of both 
cable and Hook. It also requires design of a clutch which can be released 
under full load. 

Although it does meet the specific requirement for pilot operated mechani¬ 
cal hook release, a system utilizing radio control was also investigated. 
In this system radio signals are used to operate a battery Dowered release 
mechanism in the hook. Two or more separate and distinct radio signals 
must be used to trigger the hook release to prevent operation by random 



radio signals. In addition, the hook batteries require regular recharging 
to ensure proper operation. 

In summary, the development of a cockpit controlled mechanical hook re¬ 
lease for any hoist system is considered to be a major problem area, 
whether or not it is integrated with the primary suspension cable. No 
problems exist with the design and fabrication of the cable sizes required 
for any of the hoists if only electrical conductors are required to pro¬ 
vide the power for hook actuation. 

Several of the configurations under study require a separate electrical 
conductor cable to provide the electrical power required to open the hook 
of the single-point hoist. Such a cable would be suitably protected by a 
braided wire jacket and wound on a reel. The use of a separate electrical 
‘juiiductor cable eliminates the need for conductors in the core of load sus¬ 
pension cables when a beam is used to convert from multi- to single-point 
hoist mode, as in the -5 and -16 configurations. It is more a matter of 
opinion than of fact that use of a separate electrical conductor cable 
offers advantages over that of conductors buried in, and suitably pro¬ 
tected by, the load suspension cable. 

IVo alternate solutions for the requirement of a separate mechanical cock¬ 
pit controlled load release are proposed. 

The first alternative is simply reliance on the manual ground controlled 
hook release as the backup method of release. The use of a tandem-dual 
cable cutter controlled from the cockpit will serve as a secondary 
(emergency) release* 

The other solution is to provide a cable strip-off feature in addition to 
the systems described above. Although this concept can result in loss of 
cable and hook (as well as load) if used under emergency conditions, it 
does provide a release mode entirely independent of the normal electrical 
release system for additional redundancy. 

WEIGHT 


All of the systems evaluated which offer separate functions for the single 
and multi-point hoists (the -1, -2, -3, -4, -11, and -13 configurations 
sumnarized in Tables XVII and XVIII, pages 37 and 39 ) weigh slightly more 
than tho 4000-pound goal. However, the combined function systems (the -5, 
-6, -7, -14, -15, -17, and -18 configurations) will still provide an appre¬ 
ciable weight savingB. 

This separate function system weight penalty must be balanced against the 
redundancy offered by having two separate, independent systems available 
as well as the ability to reduce the aircraft empty weight for any specific 
mission by the removal of the major components of the system not to be used. 
This capability reduces the system weight well below 4000 pounds, and even 
below the weight of the combined function systems. All systems which re¬ 
quire the combining of functions offer a total system weight below 4000 
pounds. They offer no redundancy, however, and cannot be reduced in weight 

114 



to a noticeable degree by removal of major componente, 
SYNCHRONIZATION OF MULTI-POINT HOISTS 


Synchronization of the cable travel (hook position) has been considered 
by several investigators to be a major problem area in a hydraulically 
powered multi-point hoist system. The inclusion of an electrical feed¬ 
back system will limit the maximum variation in hook position to within 
7 inches in a total cable excursion of 50 feet. In addition, the use of 
a relatively simple one-time check-out procedure will "zero out 1 ' most of 
the instrument error and further reduce the cable length variation to 
approximately 1-1/2 inches (see ERROR ANALYSIS, page 148). 


115 




COMPARATIVE RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY ANALYSIS 


A study to compare the reliability, maintainability, and unavailability 
of the various configurations (single-point plus multi-point and multi¬ 
point alone) of the subject system has been made. Table XX gives the re¬ 
sults of this preliminary study. The results are valid on a relative 
basis; however, on an absolute basis they are subject to considerable 
variability because of the limited data available at this time. 

For each configuration considered, a failure or malfunction rate is given 
for both a single-point and a multiple-point mission. These rates are not 
to be interpreted as abort rates (unable to complete mission) but rather 
as rates of unscheduled maintenance actions. The failure rate for the 
single-point missions is the rate of malfunction expected for executing a 
single-point mission only. For example, with the -1 configuration, in 
1000 hours of single-point mission flying, an average of 5*59 failures 
would be expected. Similarly, for the multi-point mission, the failure rate 
is associated with the type of mission only. 

Also included in Table XX are comparative values for the maintenance man¬ 
hours per flight hour and unavailability for the various configurations. 
Unavailability is the complement of availability. These numbers are for 
the cargo handling system only. 

Table XX also includes estimates of mission reliability data for the 13 
external cargo handling system configurations. These data are presented 
in three columns as follows: 

1. The column headed "Single-foint Only" gives the abort rate 
for the single-point system only. For example, in 1000 
hours of single-point mission flying, the -1 configuration 
would experience an average of 1.66 aborts. 

2. The column headed "Multi-Point Only" gives the abort rate 
for the multi-point system. For example, in 1000 hours of 
four point missions, the -1 configuration would experience 
an average of 3*46 aborts. 

3. The column headed "Combined System" gives the abort rate for 
the cargo system as a whole for a 1.76-hour and a .463-hour 
mission. This assumes that either the single-point or the 
multi-point system could be used for any mission. Where 
there is no redundancy, the lowest abort rate for single or 
multipoint suspension is applicable. 



TABLE XI 

RELIABILITY/MAINTAINABILITT COMPARISON 
H.L.H. EXTERNAL CARGO HANDLING SYSTEMS 


n i 
G U -H 

Ui 


fell 


aSa 

Cm W pu 


.00298 

X 

P 

-4 

P 

00 

c«- 

o 

c- 

a 

| 

3 

3 

P 

3 

Rj 





CA 

-4 

-4 



cv 

<v 

P 

CA 

IA 

ca 







8 






1 

£ 

tv 

s 

§ 

to 

C'- 

£ 


8 

H 

IA 

-4 

vO 

-4 

P 


P 





CA 

-4- 

•4 



CV 

cv 

CV 

CA 

xO 

-4 

LA 

sO 

to 

P 

rH 

rH 

o 

(V 

p 

'O 

H 

-4 

ca 

O' 

IA 

C- 

o 

to 

c*- 

00 

rH 

CV 

CA 

ca 

-S’ 

IA 

CA 

NO 

-4 

rH 

cv 

CA 

tv 

P 

CA 

vO 

CO 

a 

oj 

5t 

>o 

O' 

o 

f- 

a 

si 

$ 

vO 

-4 

$ 

rH 

IA 

ON 

IA 

H 

H 

H 

H 

CA 

-4 

-4 

H 

H 

CV 

tv 

CV 

IA 

O 

ia 

£ 

C- 

H 

-4 

CA 

P 

rH 

ON 

& 

to 

rH 

3 

8 

p 

t" 

-4 

5 

IA 

<V 

<i 

si 

vO 

cv 

P 

IA 

CA 

to 

H 

NO 

H 

si 

a 

IA 

rH 

3 

P 

>o 

ca 

00 

ca 

00 

H 

00 

«A 

CA 

to 

IA 

e'¬ 

en 

P 

a 

p 


P 

P 

8 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

• 

8 

• 

8 

• 

>o 

R 

£ 

to 

8 

ir\ 

VA 

IA 

O' 

VA 

«A 

3 


IA 

O 

a 

• 

o 

8 

IA 

IA 

P 

a 

• 

LA 

t" 

'O 

H 

• 

H 

• 

H 

• 

rH 

• 

H 

• 

C\J 

• 

rH 

• 

H 

• 

H 

• 

H 

• 

rH 

• 

H 

On 


8 

a 


H 

O' 

d 


S 

8 

8 

C'- 

-4 

3 

a 

3 


$ 


IA 

(A 

p 

a 

00 

P 

H 

d 

rH 

si 

O' 

O' 

»r\ 

H 

£ 

£ 

P 

d 

• 

d 

p 

5 

lo 

CA 

P 

-4 

5 

\A 

C*- 

ia 

IA 

tv 

cv 

CV 


IA 

IA 

C- 

IA 

rH 

a 

P 


jog 

•tT *H 

!§ ' 


n ? ? ? * ? 


***** 








EVALUATION PROCEDURE 


INTRODUCTION 


As an aid in selecting the external cargo handling system configuration 
that best meets the 40,000-pound payload requirements of the heavy lift 
helicopter, an evaluation procedure employing both qualitative and quanti¬ 
tative factors pertinent to the system design was employed. 

Productivities or costs are calculated for each of the competitive cargo 
handling designs. These results are combined with qualitative factors 
and are evaluated in a comparison matrix. The matrix attempts to quantify 
the qualitative factors in relation to productivity or cost by assigning 
relative weighting values to each of the parameters. These relative 
weighting values are based on judgment. Each of the cargo handling sub¬ 
systems is then scored. Systems within 5 pet to 10 pet of each other are 
considered to be equivalent. 

DISCUSSION 


This section presents a discussion of the methodology used by Sikorsky Air¬ 
craft to select an optimum cargo handling subsystem for the heavy lift heli¬ 
copter system. The classic steps in devising a good selection process are: 

1. Acquire complete understanding of the operational concept 
and the functional requirements of the system and subsystem. 

2. Establish criteria of effectiveness and/or cost as a basis 
for system selection. 

3. Identify all relevant factors that are pertinent to the cost 
and effectiveness of the operation. 

4. Classify all relevant factors into qualitative and quantitative 
categories. 

5. Quantify all the factors that are possible. 

6. Construct a mathematical simulation model relating all quan¬ 
tifiable factors to the criteria of selection. This model 
could consist of a simple equation or it could consist of a 
complex set of equations requiring computer processing. 

7. Exercise the simulation model to determine effectiveness 
and/or cost. 

8. Examine all qualitative factors. 

9. Evaluate and relate all factors and select optimum system. 


118 



One of the most important steps in the evaluation process is to acquire 
couplets understanding of the system operational concents and mission 
requirements. A comprehensive missions analysis is required to develop 
the technical requirements for the heavy lift helicopter and its cargo 
handling subsystem. These missions and operational analyses are presently 
in progress at Sikorsky Aircraft, but as in all concepts, such analyses 
are difficult to perform because of the uncertainty of so many of the 
basic parameters* Some of the more complex factors of such an analysis 
include consideration of the types of loads to be transported and their 
frequency distribution, frequency distribution of operating ranges, new 
loads packaging concepts and methods of suspension, logistics and main¬ 
tenance problems of field conversion of single-point and multi-point sus¬ 
pension equipment, etc. 

These factors are difficult to define at this time because the crane con¬ 
cept is still relatively new. Even though the U.S. Amy has had over 2 
years of field experience with the CH-54A in the Continental U.S. and in 
S. Viet Nam, new operational concepts are formulated almost daily. This 
is complicated by the fact that the heavy lift helicopter configuration 
has not been fully defined. 

For the purposes of this study, the mission profiles described in the 
BASIC DATA section (pages 3 and 4) were used, assuming equal distribution 
of single-point and multi-point suspensions loads and equal distribution 
of long and short range operation. Future missions and operational analy¬ 
ses may modify these assumptions, and therefore changes to some of the 
conclusions of the evaluation may result. 

The criteria of effectiveness used to evaluate the cargo handling sub¬ 
system can be either productivity of the heavy lift helicopter crane 
system or total system cost. The effect of the cargo handling subsystem 
on the performance or cost of the total heavy lift helicopter crane system 
is important, not the absolute differences of values for the cargo han¬ 
dling equipment alone. For example, one cargo handling subsystem may br> 
more reliable but heavier than another subsystem. The more reliable sub¬ 
system may not be the better one, since it is possible that the gain in 
system productivity due to the higher reliability may be more than offset 
by the loss in productivity due to the increased weight. 

Relevant factors that are considered in the evaluation process include 
weight, reliability, power required, maintainability, stability, safety, 
load acquisition and release time, design compromise to the heavy lift 
helicopter airframe, versatility, logistics problems due to conversion, 
development problems, and cost. Most of these attributes can be quanti¬ 
fied into productivity or cost relationships. However, factors such as 
versatility, airframe design compromise, and logistics problems are non- 
quantifiable at this time. These attributes will be analysed qualitatively 
and will be considered on the basis of past experience and good judgment. 


** -“-rriiTrfflniiiHi 


119 



DESIGN OBJECTIVES 


As mentioned earlier, in order to evaluate the various cargo handling sub- 
systems effectively, all factors pertinent to the performance effectiveness 
and cost of the operations must be identified. The interrelationships and 
the sensitivities of these factors are determined by combining them into a 
single effectiveness paramster of either system cost or productivity (ton- 
miles/hour). It was felt that system productivity was as accurate as cost * 

and was much easier to use, so productivity was selected as the criterion 
of effectiveness. 

A discussion of the relevant factors is presented in the following para¬ 
graphs to ensure that quantitative ratings of these parameters as used in 
the productivity formula are considered in their proper perspective and 
are not accepted as unequivocal ratings. 

System Weight 

Calculations have been made to determine the overall system and special 
mission weights for each of the alternative hoist systems under considera¬ 
tion. The mission weight is defined as the weight of equipment required 
to accomplish a specific mission, such as a single-point load, and is 
lower than the system weight in most configurations because major compo¬ 
nents of the single- or multi-point system could be removed prior to per¬ 
forming a mission. 

There are several other design considerations which must be taken into 
account while minimizing system weight. For example, a design for mlnlmnn 
weight might not be as satisfactory as a design which permits interchange- 
ability of moving parts because of the savings in maintainability and lo¬ 
gistics. Extra design features for ease of maintainability such as acces¬ 
sibility or quick disconnects can become more important than an associated 
weight penalty. 

System weight plays an important part in the determination of the produc¬ 
tivity of a configuration. Although each alternative hoist system is de¬ 
signed for a 20-ton capability, the aircraft performance is penalized by 
system weight. This penalty may affect system effectiveness in terms of 
reduced productivity if a constant gross weight heavy lift helicopter is 
assumed; or if the gross weight is increased to maintain a 20-ton payload, 
the penalty will be increased procurement cost. 

Another consideration which should be taken into account when calculating 
system weight is the type of supporting structure within the airframe. 

The single- and the tandem-rotor aircraft configuration will be affected 
in different ways by the many possible hoist system configurations. Ex¬ 
ternal placement of the motors, pumps, and hoists will affect the drag, 
while internal placement will disrupt the location of fuel cells and pas¬ 
senger or cargo compartments; thereby, additional structural weight pen¬ 
alties will be required. 


120 



These comments have been made to show that the best system is not neces¬ 
sarily the one having the lowest system weight. There are structural 
weights associated with each system which have only been estimated. In 
addition, there are other design factors which demand a degree of sophis¬ 
tication resulting in slightly Increased weight. 

Safety 

The factor of safety is one which must be expressed in qualitative terms 
rather than in quantitative terms. The design of a system may be reviewed 
and rated as either safe or unsafe. Naturally, those criteria responsible 
for an unsafe rating must be corrected before the design is acceptable. 

One of the most critical factors considered within the category of safety 
is the stability of the load. As the aircraft speed increases, the lead 
stability changes and this in turn affects the controllability of the air¬ 
craft. Speed is one of the more sensitive items in the productivity study, 
so maximum speed allowable within the limits of safety is desirable, and 
that system which allows the greatest speed within safety limitations is 
regarded as the best. 

Each of the suspension systems is capable of carrying any type of load by 
using various combinations of bridles. However, the manner in which the 
load is supported has a direct bearing upon its in-flight stability. 
Oscillations of a load affect control of the helicopter because of the 
changing drag factor and the change in location of the center of gravity 
of the load. Suspension of a load by a four-point system provides the 
most stable means of support and hence allows the greatest forward air¬ 
speed. Precise control of the load during flight permits even greater 
load stability throughout the changing attitudes of the aircraft. This 
can provide the safest system capable of the highest airspeed. However, 
load stability is also dependent upon its density. High density loads can 
be carried satisfactorily from a single-point system; high drag-low density 
loads such as downed aircraft cannot be stabilized even through the use of 
multi-point hoists, and drogue chutes are required to prevent in-flight 
oscillations. In these cases, safety of flight demands low airspeed; 
hence, productivity is a poor measure for comparing alternate hoist con¬ 
figurations. 

Reliability 

Reliability is generally regarded as the likelihood that a given system 
will function normally. With a system as sophisticated and expensive as 
a heavy lift helicopter, it is important that the cargo handling subsystem 
be as reliable as possible. Failure of the cargo handling system could 
result in grounding the entire helicopter system. 

Reliability is measured in terns of failure rates or unscheduled mainte¬ 
nance requirements. Thus, a multi-point system would be considered less 
reliable because, with a larger number of components, there are more 
chances that something will fail. A review of the type of failures should 
be made because many would occur to those components which have a direct 


121 



association with the raising and lowering of a load. If this is true* it 
might still be possible to lock the cable drums in position and utilize 
the extended cable or cables as a form of bridle. This would allow utiliza¬ 
tion of the helicopter to perform a mission with performance somewhat de¬ 
creased due to load instability. 

In several of the configurations studied there are duplicate systems, 
single and multi-point, so that failure of one system would not neces - 
sarily result in an aborted mission. Through the use of bridles or slings, 
both the single and multi-point syste&s can handle all types of loads. 

Thus it is necessary to evaluate the penalty of greater system weight and 
higher maintainability of both e. single and multi-point system against 
higher mission reliability. 

Maintainability 

The factor of maintainability is most easily represented by cost. The 
maintenance man-hours per flight hour for each system can be measured and 
converted into dollars by using standard labor rates. However, when the 
factor of maintainability is to be included in the productivity formula, 
it is represented as a function of availability. , The availability of the 
heavy lift helicopter is penalized by the downtime due to maintenance. 

This may not be completely true, however, because the scheduled mainte¬ 
nance and sometimes unscheduled maintenance of the cargo handling system 
can be done simultaneously with maintenance of the aircraft itself. The 
fallacy of this method is that in comparing two closely rated systems, the 
factor of time attributed to maintainability receives the same emphasis 
as other time factors such as loading time which have a direct effect on 
mission accomplishment. 

There are other factors to be considered in the area of maintainability 
which may not appear in the availability figure b. Standardization and 
conmonality of parts is important when considering the storage and han¬ 
dling of spares. Accessibility and vulnerability of components is impor¬ 
tant, particularly for those components which may be removed for weight 
saving purposes for daily missions. Check-out of the system without start¬ 
ing the main engines and rotor blades is important, since it permits the 
check-out to be completed by the ground crew instead of the pilot. Char¬ 
acteristics of this type are not always taken into account by quantitative 
measures and as availability, but thsy should be considered in the selec¬ 
tion of the recommended system. 

Size 

The physical, size of the systems does not appear in the productivity analy¬ 
sis because it does not directly affect the size or weight of cargo which 
cam be transported. It is important to consider the physical size of the 
system when considering its installation within an airframe. Size is less 
significant when the system is to be mounted on a crane type helicopter 
than if it is to be mounted within am existing cabin. It is assumed that 
the configurations will all be competitive in size and that it would be 
feasible to install ary of the systems in an aircraft. 


122 



Power Requirement 


It is difficult to determine the sensitivity of the power required for 
several alternative systems, especially in a productivity model. If the 
basis of comparison is cost, dollars per horsepower are readily assigned 
and provide a relative rating. If the comparison ie to be made on the 
basis of productivity, differential power required would be translated 
into pounds per horsepower and the total pounds would be subtracted from 
payload. 

System Cost 

Initial system cost is considered to be important but by itself can be 
very misleading. Not only should lifetime cost be considered, but lo¬ 
gistic cost due to maintainability and reliability must be considered. 

All of the above-mentioned design objectives can be measured as a function 
of cost and can be related to the cost of the overall system operation. 

In addition, there are several other qualitative factors which are not 
easily assigned a dollar figure but do affect operating costs of the 
system. 

Qualitative Selection Factors 

The preceding paragraphs discussed the design objectives assigned in the 
cargo handling work statement provided by the Amy. There are other de¬ 
sign criteria which may be considered of less significance but which 
should have some bearing on the system selection. Examples of some of 
these are as follows: 

Ground Handling Time 

Minimum ground handling time is important during load attachment 
because it has a direct effect on helicopter hover time. If the 
assumption is made that this eystem would be used to carry Any 
Division equipment between 10 and 20 tons, 30 pet of that equip¬ 
ment must be attached while the helicopter is in a hovering posi¬ 
tion. Hookup time then becomes a factor which could influence 
the choice of a system. The time required for ground preparation 
of the load, such as the bridle attachment prior to arrived of the 
aircraft, should not be included. This time should perhaps be in¬ 
cluded with maintainability, since it directly affects availability. 

Versatility 

The current study has shown that the one- , two- , and four-point 
systems are each capable of handling any type load through different 
combinations of bridles. The degree of effectiveness with which the 
different systems can handle all loads is not the sans. Therefore, 
further information on the type of loads to be carried could also 
influence the selection of a system. 


123 




The else of pods to be used for hospitals, troop transports* or 
cound posts should be standardized in height and width and perhaps 
in multiples of length. These could then be transferred to or from 
railroad and highway vehicles. As the super transports such as the 
C-5A become a reality, much Arny equipment will be packaged in con¬ 
tainers being specially designed for efficient loading and unloading. 
These containers will remain intact from shipper to destination so 
that compatibility with a helicopter handling system is important. 
Similarly, there is growing interest in the Fast Deployment Logistic 
(FDL) and in programs which include Amphibious helicopter Assault 
Ship (UiA) plans for unloading ships by helicopter. 

In addition to the pod or container, pallets must be accommodated 
for aerial flight. Pallets can be used not only for loading small- 
sized containers but for transporting multiple vehicles or trailers 
with their associated towing vehicles. Power suspension is extremely 
important in these situations to prevent loss of load during flight. 

Another element of versatility to be considered in selection of a 
system depends upon the desirability of splitting loads among several 
destinations. A multi-point system could be used to make more than 
one drop without requiring assistance from the ground for rearrang¬ 
ing bridles or making other adjustments. Limit ations for this type 
of operation are established by helicopter center-of-gravity limita¬ 
tions and by the weight of the cargo being carried. 

Hin—n 

After considering the advantages of multi-point systems due to the 
greater flexibility in manipulating the load, investigations should 
be made to determine that the pilot or other crewman has the means 
of controlling the load. This includes means of knowing the position 
of the load and individual tensions on the cables. Knowing this in¬ 
formation is only part of the problem. The remainder of the problem 
is providing the means of independently operating the cables so as to 
reposition the load. Even with adequate visual facilities to sight 
the load, displays are required in the aircraft due to the difficulty 
of depth perception when the ends of the cables are more than 20 feet 
below the aircraft. 

Structural Design Compromises 

At the outset of the study, the philosophy was to define a cargo 
handling system without reference to a particular type of airframe. 

It was felt that this would ensure the best type of cargo system 
which then could be attached to any type of airframe. As different 
rating methods were tried and different mission profiles examined, 
no single factor or group of factors seemed to give any of the 
alternative systems significant advantages. As various criteria 
were considered, the impact of the method of installation within an 
airframe became more relevant. The effect of system weight was 
briefly mentioned but there are other considerations in both the 


124 



single- and tandem-rotor configurations which could influence 
selection of a system. In addition to the structural arrangement 
of these types of helicopters, each has inherent handling charac¬ 
teristics which will tend to influence the relative merits of the 
systems. The criteria of compatibility should be considered at 
least as strongly as the other qualitative criteria. 

Productiv ity Arm^yw-ta 

Productivity is the rate of payload delivery for a given mission. This is 
the major quantitative parameter that will be used to compare the perform¬ 
ance effectiveness of the various cargo handling designs. The best con¬ 
figuration enables the heavy lift helicopter to deliver the greatest 
amount of payload over a specified distance in the shortest period of time* 
Productivity is a function of payload, radius of operation, availability, 
mission reliability, and total time to accomplish the mission. The weight 
differences of the various cargo handling designs are accounted for by 
modifying the payload to penalize any cargo handling design that is heavier 
than the base subsystem. The reliability and maintainability of the equip¬ 
ment are reflected in availability and in mission reliability. Lead 
stability are reflected in cruise speed, acceleration, and deceleration of 
the heavy lift helicopter. Conplexity of cargo hookup and release is re¬ 
flected in loading and unloading time. The equations and the assumptions 
used to determine productivity are described below: 


Productivity » 


where 

Payload 


Avail. 


Mis. Rel. - 


t 


n 


h 


Payload x Distance x Ava^a hllity x Mis. Rel. , . 

+ iza; 


capacity of the aircraft less the difference in 
weight between the configuration in question and 
the llghteat configuration (lightest configuration 
has 20-ton payload). 

assumed base availability of the aircraft less 
difference in unavailability between configuration 
in question and least available configuration. 
Assume aircraft has .65 availability. 

percentage of missions which, once initial, will 
not be aborted due to cargo handling system 
failure. 

t 9 + n (t ? + t x + t^ + t 5 + tg + t 2 + + t$) 

number of round trips 

time to accelerate to cruise speed with load 



t£ ■ time to accelerate to cruise speed without load 

t^ " time at cruise speed with load 

t^ “ time at cruise speed without load 

t^ ■ time to decelerate with load 

tg - time to decelerate without load 

tq - time to load 

tg ** time to unload 

t^ - time to warm up 

Hie cargo handling systems have been evaluated for single and multi-point 
cargo suspension for the following missions: 

12-ton transport: One round trip of 100-nauti cal-mile radius 

carrying 12 tons outbound only. 

20-ton transport: One round trip of 20-nautical-oile radius 

carrying 20 tons outbound only. 

The assumptions made in the productivity analysis are shown in tabular 
fora: 



1 + 4 Pt. 

4 Pt. 

1 + 2 Pt. 

2 Pt 

Time to warm up, min 

3 

3 

3 

3 

Acceleration without load, n.m./aec 

4 

4 

4 

4 

Cruise speed without load, kn 

130 

130 

130 

130 

Angle of climb 

30° 

30° 

30° 

30° 

Deceleration without load, n.a/sec 

4 

4 

4 

4 

Hoist speed, fpra 

(lower and raise 20 ft) 

60 

30 

60 

30 

Time to load, min 

1/2 

2 

1/2 

1 

Acceleration without load, n.m./eec 

3 

3 

3 

3 

Cruise speed with load, kn 

60 

60 

60 

60 

Deceleration with load, n.m./sec 

3 

3 

3 

3 



Time to unload, min 


1 + U Pt. 4 Pt. 1 + 2 Pt. 2 Pt. 

1/2 2 1/2 1 

Notes For loads carried single point and assuming the hookup 
is made with the least number of hooks available. 

The same productivity formula applies for loads carried on the multi-point 
suspension and assuming the hookup is made with the largest number of 
hooks available with the changes in assumptions listed below: 


Hoist speed, fpm 
Time to load, min 
Cruise speed with load, kn 
Time to unload, min 


1 + U Pt. L, Pt. 1 + 2 Pt. 2 Pt. 


30 

2 

100 

2 


30 

2 

100 

2 


30 

1 

80 

1 


30 

1 

80 

1 


The results of the productivity calculations for each configuration are 
given in Table XU, page 129. An average productivity for these data is 
also presented. 


QU ALITATIVE EVALUATION 

As has been previously indicated, many of the factors governing the selec¬ 
tion of an oxternal cargo handling system cannot accurately be quantified 
and included in the previous evaluation method. These factors must there¬ 
fore be ranked solely on the basis of judgment and past experience. These 
factors are then combined with productivity in a comparison matrix to 
select the best system. 

It is difficult at this point in the study to establish accurate cost in¬ 
formation. Therefore, to simplify preparation and evaluation, the 13 con¬ 
figurations have been given a relative ranking for prototype hardware and 
development costs. The following factors are included in the qualitative 
comparison matrix: 


FACTOR 


RELATIVE WEIGHTING 


Productivity 20 
Safety 10 
Cost 4 development effort 5 
Versatility 5 


127 





FACTOR 


RRTJTTTC WTSTCHTTMt 


Airframe compatibility 5 


Productivity ie given a weighting of 20 because it is a function of weighty 
reliability, and maintainability, as well as load stability in flight and 
acquisition tine. 

Safety, which includes evaluation of potential safety hazards in all opera¬ 
tional phases including load acquisition, flight, and load release has 
been given a weighting of 10. In ranking the various configurations, the 
single-point load suspension has been considered the safest for flight 
conditions, since triple redundancy is provided (tandem-dual cable cutters 
and cable strip-off) for emergency jettisoning. Two-point and four-point 
suspensions are considered to have approximately equal safety characteris¬ 
tics. While the four— point has a lower overall cable cutter reliability 
than the two-point, a four-cable suspension is considered to offer suffi¬ 
cient redundancy to offset this factor. 

The cost of prototype hardware and development effort, versatility, and 
the compatibility of the system to the airframe have been given weighting 
factors of 5. 

A summary of the results of the qualitative comparison matrix for the 
heavy lift helicopter is presented in Table XXII, page 130. Configurations 
with scores within 5 pet of each other aim considered to be approximately 
equivalent. 


128 








130 



V 


SUMMARY 


All 13 configurations studied during Phase I have been evaluated with re¬ 
spect to the following parameters: 

1. Weight 

2. Reliability 

3. Safety 

4. Maintainability 

5. Physical Sine 

6. Power 

7. System cost 

8. System development effort 

9. Technical confidence 

10. Redundancy 

11. Versatility 

12. Airframe compatibility 

On the basis of this Phase I investigation, an external cargo handling 
system incorporating a mechanically powered single-point hoist and hydrau¬ 
lically powered multi-point hoists is considered to best meet the require¬ 
ments of a 40,000-pound-payload heavy lift helicopter. 

For a single- plus four-point system the -1 configuration 
is recommended. 

For a single- plus two-point system the -11 configuration 
is reconmended. 

The major factors leading to this selection are as follows: 

1. While the -1 and -11 separate function configurations are 
heavier than the combined function systems and exceed the 
4000-pound goal by approximately 10 pet as a total system, 
the capability of major component removal results in a 
single function weight of approximately 60 pet of the de¬ 
sign goal. 

2. Separate function systems such as the -1 and -11 configurations 
provide better aerial cargo system availability, since the mal- 

131 





function of one system does not necessarily down the aircraft. 

The single and multi-point systems of these two configurations 
have entirely separate power sources. This provides greater 
drive system reliability than that of the separate function 

systems. 

3. A single-point load suspension is considered the safest for 

flight conditions, since the normal electrical release mode is „ 

backed up by an emergency system with triple redundancy. Even 
total malfunction of ell release modes does not inherently pro¬ 
duce aircraft instabilities, as in the case of partial failure 
of any of the multi-point systems combined to perform single¬ 
point missions. 

A. The -1 and -11 configurations require the least development 
effort to achieve the desired goals of this program. In addi¬ 
tion, the proposed clutch-reverser unit for the mechanical drive 
single-point hoist can be replaced by either the variable speed 
drive unit or a hydraulic motor if these systems prove to be 
advantageous as the state of the art is advanced. 

5. The -1 configuration was selected rather than the -2 primarily 
because it utilises different power sources for the singlo- 
and the multi-point hoist systems. A hydraulic motor, pump, or 
clutch failure would not prevent use of the aircraft for a cargo 
handling mission. In addition, both the pump and the motor pro¬ 
posed for the -2 configuration require further developmental 
effort. 

6. The -1 and -11 configurations can be adapted to either the single- 
or the tandem-rotor aircraft. They are easily adapted to the 
single-rotor type because of the proximity of the accessory gear¬ 
box and the single-point hoist. Addition of a gearbox between the 
drive shafting connecting the forward and aft rotors is required 
to provide a power source for the clutch-reverser unit on the 
tandem-rotor aircraft. 

The -1 configuration utilising a single-point hoist and four multi-point 
hoists is considered the better of the two, especially for the single¬ 
rotor aircraft, because of its versatility and compatibility with air¬ 
frame and structure. 

1. For short-range missiona, the single-point load suspension is 
the most versatile. It requires lower hookup and release times 
and has higher hoisting speeds. Analysis indicates that the 
four-point system has only a slightly better aircraft cruise * 

■peed advantage over the two-point system for missions of 
longer range. However, the four-point load suspension has 
better versatility, since no special bridle or rigging is re¬ 
quired to carry a wide variety of vehicles, as is the case for 
any two-point system. 


132 



The -1 configuration is more compatible with the airframe 
structure, elnce it requires only one well for the single- 
point hoist installation. The single-point hoist is partic¬ 
ularly adaptable to the single-rotor helicopter, since it is 
located directly under vjk! utilizes the main transmission 
support structure. The four-point hoists are located out¬ 
board of the fuselage structure on davit type structures 
with suitable aerodynamic fairings. 

The -11 configuration with a single- plus two-point load 
suspension requires three airframe wella. In addition to 
a small airframe weight penalty, these wells utilize the 
crane-type fuselage cavities normally used for fuel tankage. 



PHASE II 


PRELIMINARY DESIGN 


DISCUSSION 


The external cargo handling system selected for the preliminary design 
phase of this study is a single- plus four-point arrangement utilizing a 
mechanically driven single-point hoist and four hydraulically driven zero- 
moos nt hoists as shown in Figures 68 and 69, pages 251 and 253* 

The single-point hoist is capable of raising and lowering a 40,000-pound 
load 100 feet at a rate of 60 feet per minute. The single-point hoist 
drive train consists of a clutch-reverser unit, two angle gearboxes, and 
several sections of shafting. On the single-rotor heavy lift helicopter, 
the clutch-reverser unit is mounted on the accessory gearbox (Reference 3> 
Figure 58, page 245) permitting operation on the ground from the auxiliary 
power plant with the rotors stationary as well as from the rotor system in 
flight. 

The four-point hoists are rated at 11,550 pounds at a speed of 30 feet per 
minute and contain 50 usable feet of cable. These units are hydraulically 
driven by a pump mounted on the accessory gearbox and utilize a hydro 
electric feedback control system to ensure synchronized load lifting. The 
four-point hoists can be operated on the ground without the rotors turning 
when the accessory gearbox is driven by the auxiliary power plant. 

Both the single-point and the four-point hoists are readily removable from 
the aircraft when missions requiring minimum empty weight are to be uhdsr- 
taken. 

For the tandem-rotor heavy lift helicopter, the single-point hoist has 
been located with the drum axis parallel to the aircraft longitudinal 
centerline (B.L. 0 as shown in Figure 70, page 255), This arrangement was 
selected to accomodate the somewhat smaller lateral trim moment capability 
of the tandem. Since the hoist is driven from the interconnecting shaft¬ 
ing, it cannot be operated from the APP on the ground with the rotors 
locked. 

The investigation conducted herein, as well as the experience gained on 
the CH-54A Sky crane, has clearly demonstrated to the authors that the basic 
preliminary design of ary external cargo handling system is interrelated 
and should be conducted concurrently with that of the If die airframe. 

This is particularly true for the mechanically driven dingle-point hoist 
system selected. This system is undoubtedly more suit „d to the single- 
rotor heavy lift crane type helicopter (where the authors' experience lies) 
than to the tandem. Several other single-point hoist designs, although 
somewhat more complex, might be more appropriate for the tandem in view of 
its lateral trim limitations. Included among these are: 


134 



Large diameter, narrow width multi wrap drum 

Capstan type, zero-moment 

Traversing drum 

Two part, doubled reeved 

If rotor locked ground operation is mandatory, the use of hydraulic power 
will most likely result in an appreciable weight savings at a slightly 
lower mission reliability (see Table XX, page 117)• 

The hydraulically powered four-point hoist system is equally adaptable to 
both tandem- and single-rotor helicopters. The structural and hydraulic 
system design problems associated with hoist mounting drive and control 
are similar for both aircraft. The four-point hoist installation for the 
tandem-rotor heavy lift helicopter is shown in Figure 70, page 255* 


% 







SINGLE-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 


HOIST 


The single-point hoist. Figure 71, pegs 257, is a one-part, single-reeved 

type. The cable is wrapped in a single layer on a grooved drum, which is 

coated with a 0,25-inch-thick polyurethane rubber jacket and is attached > 

to one end of the drum by a pin and clamp tjpe fitting. Even winding of 

the cable on the drum is maintained by a level wind mechanism consisting 

of a ball screw driven bellmouth assembly. The level wind structure is 

free to rotate about the drum axis so that towing loads, with the cable 

swing 60° aft, will not result in high loads being reacted through it. 

In addition, the level wind contains scrub rollers which provide the power 
required to pull the cable off the drum without the need for an added 
weight on the hook. The scrub rollers are adjustable to compensate for 
wear. 

Limit switches are also mounted on the level wind. AH gearing required 
to power the ball screw and scrub rollers is supported in one level wind 
support arm. The bellmouth assembly is mounted on the ball screw nut and 
a reaction pipe. The reaction pipe provides the restraint required to 
transmit the rotary action of the ball screw into linear motion of the 
bellmouth-nut assembly. It also reacts the moment created when lateral 
cable swing is encountered. The bellmouth assembly contains the cable 
cutters which are used to shear the cable in the event of an emergency. 

A split, easily removable wear liner is also contained in the bellmouth 
aase^>ly. 

A Weston brake (Reference 6) is provided to prevent the load from dropping 
in the event of a power failure. It functions automatically and is lo¬ 
cated between the first and second stages of the hoist reduction gearing. 

A hydraulically powered free reel clutch assembly is built into the hoist 
gearbox to permit the hook and cable assembly to be jettisoned in the 
event of a hook release malfunction. A manual control valve actuated by 
a push-pull control cable from the cockpit diverts flow from the aircraft 
utility system to the free reel clutch assembly. It is reusable and re¬ 
sets automatically when the hydraulic pressure is removed. The Weston 
brake is located between the input shaft and the free reel clutch assembly 
so that it does not affect proper free reeling operation. 

A completely sealed slip ring assembly it provided to permit transfer of 
electrical control and power signals to the electrical conductors in the 
core of the main suspension cable from the e rcraft's electrical system. 

A quick disconnect is provided to permit fleui removal of the cable with- « 

out affecting the slip ring assembly. 

A conventional gear reduction system with an overall reduction ratio of 
443 to 1 is used. The first and second reduction stages of 4*190 to 1 
and 3*513 to 1 are conventional spur gears. The third stage of reduction, 

30.111 to 1, is a compound planetary tystem. All internal gearing is 


136 



splash lubricated and completely sealed. Oil fill, drain, and level plugs 
are provided. 

Auxiliary drives are conventional spur gears. These gears are coated with 
a dry film lubricant and in addition are lightly coated with grease. Tbs 
feears are enclosed by weathertight fiber glasB shields which are easily 
removable for inspection and servicing. A shear joint is provided to pro¬ 
tect the ball screw assembly in the event that excessive side loads should 
tend to jam the level wind assembly. Replacement of the shear pin, follow¬ 
ing the removal of the cause of jamming, is possible without disassembly 
of the hoist. 

A cable length potentiometer is provided. It is easily accessible both 
for maintenance and/or replacement. An anti-backlash cover is provided 
to prevent the cable from jumping off the drum in the event a load is air 
dropped. 


CLUTCH-REVERSER UNIT 

A clutch-reverser unit mounted on the accessory drive gearbox provides the 
power to operate the main hoist. It is a conventional reversing gear 
similar to the type comnonly used in marine applications. The unit con¬ 
sists of five spur gears, two oil actuated wet plate clutches, and a bevel 
gear set as shown in Figure 72, page 259* The cil used to engage the 
clutches and to provide clutch plate coolant when the hoist is inoperative 
is supplied by a gear pump through appropriate solenoid operated valves. 
This clutch control-lubrication pump is mounted on the accessory gearbox. 

The clutches are spring loaded in the disengaged position. To hoist the 
load, oil at 250 psi pressure is supplied to clutch number 1. Clutch 
number 2 remains disengaged. To lower, the sequence is reversed. When 
hoist operation is not required, bouh clutches numbers 1 and 2 are dis¬ 
engaged. The hoist drive shafting is therefore stationary except when 
loads are being raised or lowered. Smooth clutch engagement is attained 
by a modified form of pressure modulation accomplished by use of an orifice 
between the accelerator and force cavities. 

When the clutch is engaged, pressure oil enters the accelerator cavity. 
Since the accelerator cavity displacement is small, the pressure drop is 

. momentary. The clasping force is then generated by a controlled pressure 

buildup in the force cavity created by the metering of a small amount of 
oil required through the orifice in the accelerator piston. A schematic 
showing this operation is shown in Figure A3. 

» The mechanical variable speed drive unit of Appendix II, page 2A5, was in¬ 

vestigated as an alternate means of providing power to and reversing di¬ 
rection of the single-point hoist. 


i 

i? 

I 

$ 

I 

i 

f 





237 



INPUT 






















CABLE 


The single-point hoist cable is stainless steel and is of 18 x 19 non¬ 
rotating construction. It has an outside diameter of 1.39 inches and a 
guaranteed minimum breaking strength of 150,000 pounds. The individual 
wires are .060 inch in diameter and are made from heat treated type 302 
stainless steel. The 18 x 19 construction, 18 strands with 19 wires per 
strand, gives a flexibility greater than that attained in the 18 x 7 
cable presently used in the CH-54A main cargo hoist. 

The core of the cable contains seven electrical conductors of stranded 
wire construction. They are helically wound and encased in a tough, re- 
silent, plastic jacket. Five of these conductors are required to trans¬ 
mit the electrical power required to operate the actuating solenoid in the 
cargo hook. Two conductors are spares; thus, field level maintenance per¬ 
sonnel can "wire out" defective conductors without removing cable. This 
"wiring out" is possible by using the following procedure: 

(a) Remove hook from swivel assembly and slip ring assembly 
from swivel. 

(b) Remove slip ring assembly from hoist by pulling only far 
enough out of housing to service. 

(c) Check continuity to determine good conductor. 

(d) Connect good conductor to proper terminals after 
removing defective corductor. 

(e) Reinstall slip ring in hoist. 

(f) Reinstall slip ring in swivel assembly and hook into 
swivel. 

(g) Check for normal hook operation. 

firibedding the conductors in the core of the cable protects them from 
damage due to rough handling and from adverse environmental conditions. 

Three design features have been incorporated in the single-point hoist 
design to provide good cable fatigue strength. Abrasion type wear, which 
results from cable slippage on the drum during the starting cycle, will be 
appreciably reduced by the use of a hard rubber jacket molded onto the 
aluminum drum; an added advantage is that drum wear is also reduced. In 
addition, a drum diameter greater than the minimum permissible based on a 
standard wire diameter to drum ratio is used. This results in a stress 
level in the cable, duj to winding on the drum, which is 42 pet lower than 
that which would result if the minimum permissible diameter of 24 inches 
were used. By the use of a single layer design on the drum, the abrasion 
wear which would occur at cable crossovers if a multiple layer design were 
used is completely eliminated. 


139 





The estixui^ed stretch in the cable, based on preliminary tests conducted 
on a 5-foot sample length of 18 x 19 cable, is equal to 1.53 x 10~° inches 
per foot of cable extended per pound of load or at maximum load and cable 
length: 

Cable stretch - (1.53 x 10" 6 ) (100) (40,000) - 6.22 inches (26) 


MTST.KTJ.AHraxjs COMPONENTS 
Hook-Swivel Assembly 

The hook-swivel assembly provides the means for attaching cargo to the 
single-point hoist cable. It permits free rotation of loads about the 
cable centerline and transmits electrical control and indicator signals 
from the hoist cable to the hook. 

The assembly consists of a swivel assembly and a hook assembly. These 
assemblies are integral units and can be quickly separated for either 
maintenance or replacement. 

Swivel 

The swivel asseobly consists of a main housing assembly and a slip ring 
assenfciy. The main housing is threaded to accept the cable and contains 
a sealed grease packed thrust bearing. Two lugs permit attachment to the 
hook assembly. The slip ring assembly, which is a completely sealed unit, 
is bolted into the lower part of the housing. An electrical conduit, with 
suitable shielding to prevent wear due to rough usage, connects the slip 
ring to the hook assembly. An AN 4064 type dehydrator, suitably protected 
from abuse, is also installed to indicate excessive amounts of moisture 
contamination without the need for disassembly. The complete assembly 
weighs approximately 48 pounds. 

Hook 

The hook assembly is of the open throat or self-loading design. A toggle 
linkage is used to lock the load beam in position. A rotary solenoid pro¬ 
vides power to open the locking linkage which allows the load to open the 
load beam. The load beam is restrained, following load release, by a re¬ 
placeable rubber bumper. The beam is returned to the locked position by 
an integral spring. Integral microswitches are incorporated to provide 
the signal required to indicate load beam position. A compression spring 
mounted at the load beam pivot point and a microswitch provide the means 
to initiate the automatic touchdown release mode. While the load is being 
supported on the load beam, the spring is compressed and the microswitch is 
not actuated. When the load on the beam is reduced below 150 pounds (by 
putting the load on the ground), the spring extends and the microswitch is 
actuated. This signal causes the solenoid to open the locking linkage and 
thereby release the load. 

The solenoid is completely enclosed and sealed in a weathertight housing. 


140 



All micro switches are completely sealed. An AN 4064 type dehydrator, suit¬ 
ably protected from abuse, is installed to indicate excessive amounts of 
contamination without the need for disassembly. A manual release control 
knob is mounted on the outside of the hook. It pemits manual opening of 
the same locking linkage as the solenoid and provides a redundant hook re¬ 
lease method. A knob design is used instead of a lever, since it is less 
subject to accidental fouling from slings and other load attachment type 
equipment. 

Two handles, one on each side, ire provided to facilitate ground handling 
of the hook. A rugged keeper is spring loaded to permit load rings to be 
slid onto the load beam with ease and yet to prevent them from sliding off 
under adverse loading conditions. The complete hook assembly weighs 102 
pounds. 

Decoupler 

The single-point hoist decoupler (or isolator) is a nonlinear spring for 
which the spring constant increases as the load increases. By varying the 
stiffness of the spring with load, it is possible to maintain a constant 
natural frequency for the load and cable system. This system frequency is 
sufficiently removed from the one per revolution of mean ratio excitation 
frequency to eliminate any tendencies of vertical oscillation (vertical 
bounce). 

A liquid spring is used in this application. It is provided with a 10,000- 
pound preload and low friction seals to minimize the operational coulomb 
friction (less than 5 pet of the applied load) and breakaway force (less 
than 250 pounds). 

The incorporation of a reentrant short pipe type orifice in the liquid 
spring retards the return stroke of the isolator when a load is air dropped. 
Ibis eliminates the use of shock struts and causes a consequent reduction 
in both weight and complexity. 

An integral load cell permits cable loads to be measured. A charging cyl¬ 
inder, pressurized by the aircraft's utility hydraulic system, compensate* 
both for temperature induced pressure changes and any leakage that may 
occur. 


CONTROLS AND INDICATOR SYSTEM 


Single-point hoist and hook controls are available to both pilots and to 
the hoist operator (aft-facing pilot). 

The master control for the hoist is located on the console between the 
pilots. It consists of a master switch, which energizes either the single- 
or four-point hoist system, and a station selector switch, which permits 
hoist operation by either pilot, copilot, hoist operator, or all three. A 
three-position rocker switch located on all three collective pitch sticks 
allows the hoist to be raised, lowered, or stopped. This switch is spring 



loaded to the off position. A guarded cable shear switch located in the 
overhead console between the pilots permits the cable to be cut in the 
event of an emergency. 

The free reel release lever located in the center console on the floor be¬ 
tween the pilots permits the cable and hook assembly to be jettisoned in 
the event of an emergency. The master switch ensures that only the appro¬ 
priate hoist system will be capable of free reeling. 

A cable cutter test panel is located in close proximity to the shear 
switch. It can be used to permit preflight checking of the firing circuit. 

A similar shear switch and a test panel are located on the bulkhead to the 
right of the hoist operator. A free reel release lever is also provided. 

Cable length and cable load indicators are provided for both the pilot and 
hoist operator. 

The master control for the cargo hook is located in the center console be¬ 
tween the pilots. It contains a station selector switch which permits 
hook operation by either pilot, copilot, or hoist operator, and a mode se¬ 
lector switch which can be placed on ELEC. REL., AUTO. REL., or SAFE. 
Pv«h- V ' , ’ttr" switches on all three cyclic control sticks permit the hooks 
to be opened. 

Lights in the main advisory panel and at the hoist operator's station in¬ 
dicate when the hook is in the AUTO REL. condition or when it is in the 
(FEN position. 


142 



FOUR-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 


HOIST 

The four-point hoists (Figure 73 , page 26l) are universally mounted and 
are of the one-part, single-reeved type. The universal mounting, as 
shown by Figure 69, page 253* permits the hoist to be pivoted through a 
cone with an included angle of 60°. This enables attachment to loads of 
the wide variety of physical dimensions that are within the load carrying 
capability of the H.L.H. Figure 3 , page 13, shows the space envelope for 
the load attachment points that are within the hoists capability without 
exceeding the 60° included cone angle. 

Since the hoist is mounted in a universal joint, attwII side loads will be 
reacted in the level wind support structure. Figure 44 illustrates this 
condition. To reduce wear of both cable and bellmouth, two nonpowered, 
polyurethane rubber coated rollers are integrated into the bellmouth 
assembly. 



Figure 44. Four-Point Hoist Attitude at 
Cable Extremes. 


143 







The “able Is wrap pad In a single layer on a grooved drum which ie covered 
by a 0.25-inch-thick Molded rubber jacket which is attached to the drum 
by a pin and clamp fitting. A level wind mechanism, consisting of a ball 
screw driven roller bellmouuh assembly, ensures jven distribution of the 
cable across the drum. Scrub rollers are used to provide the tension re¬ 
quired tj pull the cable off thj drum and are adjustable to compensate 
for wear. 

The power required to drive the scrub teller and the ball screw is supplied 
by a chain drive from a drum mounted sprocket. The roller bellmouth assem¬ 
bly is supported on a ball screw nut and a reaction pipe. The reaction 
pipe provides the restraint necessary to transmit the rotary motion of the 
ball screw into a linear motion of the roller bellmouth-nut assembly. The 
cable cutters, which are used to shear the cable in the event of an emer¬ 
gency, are located in the rjller bellmouth assembly. 

A Weston brake is provided to prevent the load from dropping in the event 
of a power failure. It fmotions automatically and is located between the 
first and second stages of the main drive gear train. 

A hydraulically actuated fiee riel clutch similar to that used in the 
single-point hoist (see page 136) is incorporated in the hoist. 

A completely sealed slip ring ass-uibly is provided to transfer electrical 
signals from the aircraft to the main suspension cable on the hoist. A 
quick disconnect fitting permits hoist cable renjval without affecting the 
slip ring assembly. 

Microswitches are provided to limit cable travel, and a cable length poten¬ 
tiometer is provided. A feedback control system potentiometer and clutch 
assembly is also integrated in the hoist drive train. 

An anti-backlash cover prevents the cable from Jumping off the drum in the 
event that a load is air dropped. 

The power gear train consists of four reduction stages with an overall re¬ 
duction ratio of 514.4 to 1. The first and second reduction stages, 4*52 
to 1 and 6.27 to 1, are conventional spur gears. The third and fourth 
stages, 4.90 to 1 and 3*70 to 1, are conventional planetary gear sets. 

All of this gearing is splash lubricated and completely sealed. Oil fill, 
drain, and level plugs are provided. 


HYDRAULIC jYSTEM 


The hoist pump is a yoke type in which the inclination of the yoke estab¬ 
lishes the angle of the swashplate, to which the displacement of the pump 
is proportional. When the yoke is rotated across the center, or no-flow, 
position the direction of flow through the puap can be reversed. The pump 
displacement is controlled by a single stage servo positioner. The signal 

144 



to the valve is electrical, and control power is supplied by the replenish¬ 
ment hydraulic system. If either the control signal or control pressure 
is interrupted, the pump returns to the no-flcw position. The magnitude 
and polarity of the electrical control signal determines quantity and 
direction of pump flow. The control system is designed to permit seven 
delivery positions: 1/4 flow, 1/2 flew, and full flew in both directions 
and zero flow. The pump displacement is 1.6 cu in./rev. It is rated at 
a flow of 45 gpm at 6000 rpm and weighs 20 pounds. 

Motors 




{ 

« 

t 

i 


The motors are of the fixed displacement type whose direction of rotation 
depends on the direction of flow. They have a displacement of 0.95 cu in./ 
rev and an output power, at 3000 psi, of x7.5 horsepower. They weigh 10 
pounds each. 

Hydroelectrical Feedback System 

The basic hydraulic system is a pressure demand type in which the direc¬ 
tion and rate of flow are established by control of the hoist pump and the 
pressure developed is determined by line losses and the load. This type 
of system eliminates the heat generation of a system which uses a pressure 
compensated pump at anything less than full load. The system is closed 
and does not contain a reservoir. Losses from the system through pump and 
motor leakage are made up by a separate replenishment system. The pump 
supplying the replenishment system also provides control pressure tc the 
hoist punp controller and cooling flow to the hoist pump. 

Synchronized operation of all four hoists is obtained by use of a hydro¬ 
electrical feedback system which utilizes servo controlled flow divider 
valves to control the flow to individual hoist motors, as shown by 
Figure 45, page 146. 

The division r f flow between forward and aft and between port and star¬ 
board hoists is established by servo controlled flow divider valves. The 
signal to the flow dividers is derived from a comparison of the signals 
from rotary potentiometers on each hoist. The output signals from the 
potentiometers on the forward pair of hoists supply two amplifiers. The 
output of one amplifier is proportional to the algebraic sum of the signals, 
ti*e output of the other is proportional to the algebraic difference between 
the signals. The potentiometers on the aft pair of hoists supply two 
similar amplifiers. The outputs from the sunning amplifiers of both for¬ 
ward and aft pairs are supplied to another amplifier, the output o. which 
is proportional to the difference between the two supply signals. The 
output of this amplifier controls the flow divider valve which determines 
the distribution of flow between the forward and aft hoist pairs. 

Division of a flow between port and starboard hoists, foxvard or aft, is 
effected by a flow divider valve which is controlled by the signal from 
the differencing amplifier of the appropriate hoist pair. 

During lowering of a load the signal to the flow divider valve to correct 

145 





CLUTCH 




an error must be of the opposite sign to that to correct an error when 
raising a load. To achieve this, the polarity of the potentiometers is 
reversed when the direction of movement is reversed. 

Operation of the hoists individually is accomplished by supplying bias 
signals to the two relevant flow divider valves to direct flow to one 
hoist only. During this beeping operation, the output of the pump will 
be l/4 of its full flow delivery to prevent overspeeding of the hoist 
motor. 

The forward or aft hoists may be operated in pairs by supplying a bias 
signal to the forward/aft division flow divider and a centering signal 
to the other approp .ate flow divider valve. During this dual*beeping 
operation, the output of the pump will be 1/2 full flow delivery te pre¬ 
vent overspeeding of the hoist motor. 

Magnetic clutches between the potentiometers and the hoists will dis¬ 
engage during beeping and reengage for collective operation. Thus the 
eyetem can be trimmed for any load shape and the established cable lengths 
will be maintained during collective operation. 

The system will be somewhat load sensitive. A heavily loaded hoist will 
lag initially until the bias on the flow divider valve is sufficient to 
compensate for the unequal loads. The hoists will then operate at the 
same nominal rate. If collective operation is stopped at this stage and 
errors are recovered by beeping, the hoists will continue to operate at 
the eame rate and the load will remain level when collective operation ie 
resumed. This occurs because, during beeping, the potentiometer settings 
and hence the signals to the flow dividers were unchanged and the resis¬ 
tances of the circuits remained balanced. 

System Components 

The flow divider valves provide the means of varying the resistance of 
each hydraulic circuit to achieve equal flow ratee to each hoist regard¬ 
less of the load. The valve ie comprised of two stages. The first stage 
is a torque motor operated, flapper-nozzle type which establishes pilot 
pressures in response to the differential signals in the coils. The sec¬ 
ond stage ie two spool type throttle valves which are positioned by pilot 
pressures from the first stage. In operation, an electrical signal to the 
valve causes the second stage spool to move from the center position and 
provide increased restriction to flow in one leg. The increase in re¬ 
striction is proportional to the magnitude of the electrical eignal. 

Two sizes of valves are required, one handling a total flow of 45 gpm to 
control the division of flow between forward and aft hoist pairs, the 
other to control the division of flow between port and starboard hoists 
and to be capable of passing 22.5 gpm total flow. Two of the latter type 
are to be used. The three valves will be mounted together to make one 
compact unit and to eliminate connecting plumbing. 


147 





The potentiometers are high precision 10 turn type with a total resistance 
error of + l/2 pet, a linearity error of ,Q3 pet, and a resolution error 
of .09 pet. 

Electromagnetic clutches are used to drive the potentiometers. Since they 
are of the magnetic particle type, they will not be affected by tempera¬ 
ture and humidity. Wear and adjustment requirements will be negligible, 
since there it no contact between the driver and driven elements. 

The main system lines will be of stainless steel with a 1-inch O.D. and a 
.065-inch wall thickness. Lines to the individual hoists will also be of 
stainless steel with a 3/4-inch O.D. and a .049-inch wall thickness. 


ERROR ANALYSIS 

A hydroelectrical feedback system (page 145) is need to provide synchro¬ 
nous operation of the four-point hoist system to minimize the variation in 
hoist operating speeds due to differences in load, motor leakage, mechani¬ 
cal and hydraulic efficiencies, and errors introduced by the flow con¬ 
trol components. Errors are Introduced by the sensing elements, by hy¬ 
steresis in the control components, and by drua and cable diameter toler¬ 
ance. 

Difference in hoist positions can be caused by the errors in the control 
elements (steady state errors) or by bias in the system necessary to 
accomodate different loads, leakages, or efficiencies (dynamic errors). 

The latter can be removed by beeping the offending hoist (or hoists) until 
the load is level (or at the desired attitude) and then continuing collec¬ 
tive operation. As this dynamic error can be eliminated, it will not be 
coi sidered in the error analysis. The steady state error is that differ¬ 
ence in hoist position which cannot be sensed by the potentiometers 
(resolution error), or is insufficient to actuate the flow divider valve, 
and that difference in hoist position which is necessary to condensate to 
linearity and total resistance tolerances of the potentiometers. The 
specification of the potentiometers will permit a maximum total resistance 
error of + l/2 pet, a maximum linearity error of + .03 pet, and a maximum 
resolution error of + .03 pet. The flow divider valve will have a hy¬ 
steresis of not greater than 1 pet of its rated signal, i.e., the signal 
to direct all flow to one port, and the control system is so designed that 
a discrepancy of 6 inches in hoist position will produce this rated signal. 

The steady state error is composed of two components: one part is depend¬ 
ent upon the amount of cable travel; the other is independent of cable 
movement. The total resistance tolerance produces an error dependent upon 
cable travel; other control system errors are independent of cable move¬ 
ment. In assessing the steady state error, it is unnecessary to consider 
the linearity of the flow divider valves or amplifiers, as in the steady 
state these components will always be operating at the same point of their 
characteristic. The errors made possible by the linearity and resolution 
tolerance of the potentiometers is a function of the total hoisting capac¬ 
ity;!. e., the error introduced by the linearity error of .03 pet is .18 inch. 


146 



The tolerance on total resistance produces an error of .5 pet of the move¬ 
ment of the hoisting (i.e., after L feet of hoisting the error could be 
.005 L feet). 

Total errors in the system are sumaarized below: 





Error in a 

ft 


Percent 

50-Foot Syst« 



Errors 

(inches) 


Errors Dependent on Cable Travel: 



ft 

Cable drum diameter tolerance 

-.045 

±.006L 


Cable diameter tolerance 

±.020 

±.0Q3L 


Pot. total resistance 

±.50 

±.06QL 


tolerance 




Errors Independent on Cable Travel: 




Pot. linearity tolerance 

±.03 

±.18 


Pot. resolution 

±.03 

±.18 


Flow divider valve dead band 

- 

±.06 


where: L is the distance traveled in feet 

With the data shewn above, it is possible to derive a formula describing 
maximum cable length discrepancy between any two hoists: 

Error, inches « .138 x cable travel in feet + 0.84 (27) 

These data are shown graphically in Figure 46. 

The total system error may be effectively reduced in service b7 the use of 
a calibrated, parallel connected, trimming potentiometer* on each hoist. 

A one-time check-out procedure, which requires extending the cables a full 
50 feet and then reeling in to the in-limit stops, is required. The dif¬ 
ference in cable lengths extended after the "fastest' 1 hoist reaches its 
limit stop is measured and the trimming potentiometer is adjusted to com¬ 
pensate for the error of the out-of-time hoist(s). This adjustment may 
compensate for errors due to potentiometer total resistance tolerance and 
could theoretically reduce the 7-3/4-inch error in 50 feet to approximately 
3 inches. Practical considerations, such as the desire to reel in at no 
load, would probably reduce the actual error to a value slightly greater 
than 4 inches in 50 feet. This approach will require further investigation. 


CABLE 


The four-point hoist cables are stainless steel and are of 18 x 19 non¬ 
rotating construction. They have an outside diameter of 0.79 inch and a 
guaranteed minimal breaking strength of 49*000 pounds. The individual 
wires are .035 inch in diameter and are made from heat treated type 302 

149 






Figure U>, Difference in Cable Length m Cable 
Trarel, Peur-Polnt Holst Stjrstaou 


150 



% 


stainless steel. The IS x 19 construction, 18 strands with 19 wires per 
strand, gives a flexibility greater than that attained in the 7/8 diameter 
18 x 7 cable presently used in the CH-54A main cargo hoist. 

The core of the cable contains seven electrical conductors of stranded 
wire construction. They are helically wound and encased in a tough, re¬ 
silient, plastic jacket. Five of these conductors are required to trans¬ 
mit the electrical power required to operate the actuating solenoid in the 
cargo hook. Two conductors are spares; thus field level maintenance per¬ 
sonnel can "wire out" defective conductors without removing the cable. 

This "wiring out" procedure is identical with that described for the 
single-point hoist cable on page 139. Embedding the conductors in the 
core of the cable protects them from damage due to rough handling and from 
adverse environmental conditions. 

Three design features have been incorporated in the four-point hoist de¬ 
sign to provide good cable fatigue strength. Abrasion type wear, which 
results from cable slippage on the drum during the starting cycle, will be 
appreciably reduced by the use of a hard rubber jacket molded onto the 
aluminum drum; an added advantage is that drum wear is also reduced. In 
addition, a drum diameter greater than the minlMum permissible based on a 
standard wire diameter to drum ratio is used. This results in a stress 
lsvel in the cable duo to winding on the drum, which is 58 pet lower than 
that which would result if the minimum permissible drum diameter of 14 
inches were used. By the use of a single layer design on the drum, the 
abrasion wear which would occur at cable crossovers if a multiple layer 
design were used is completely eliminated. 

The estimated stretch in the cable, based on preliminary teats conducted 
on a sample length of 18 x 19 cable, is equal to 4.75 x 10~° inches per 
foot of cable extended per pound of load or at maximum load and cable 
length: 

Cable stretch - (4.75 x 1CT 6 ) (50) (11,550) - 2.75 inches (28) 


UTSTKT.TJMEinus COMPONENTS 


Hook-Swivel Assembly 

The hook-swivel assembly provides the means for attaching cargo to the 
hoist cable. It permits free rotation of loads about the cable centerline 
and transmits electrical control and indicator signals from the hoist 
cabls to the hook. The use of a swivel assembly permits individual loads 
to be carried on the four-point hoists. This feature will permit individ¬ 
ual loads, such as fuel bags, to be carried to and off loaded at separate 
sites. The assembly consists of a swivel assembly and a hook assembly. 
These assemblies are integral units and can be quickly separated for either 
maintenance or replacement. Figure 74, page 263, shows the hook-swivel 
assembly. The relative sizes of both the 40,000 pound and the 11,550 
pound capacity hooks are also shown. 


.. . 


151 



Swivel 


The swivel assembly consists of a main housing assembly and a slip ring 
assembly. The main housing is threaded to accept the cable end fitting 
and contains the sealed, grease packed thrust bearing. Two lugs permit 
attachment to the hook assembly. ▲ slip ring assembly, which is a com¬ 
pletely sealed unit, is bolted to the lower part of the housing. The 
complete assembly is identical in design to the single-point hoist swivel 
assembly described in detail on page 140. The swivel assembly weighs 21 
peunds. 

Hook 

The hook aseeitoly is of the open throat, or self loading, design. It is 
similar in design to the 40,000-pound-capacity hook used for the single¬ 
point hoist which is described in detail on page 140. One feature, the 
automatic touchdown release, has been eliminated in the 11 , 550 -pound-capac¬ 
ity hook as a safety feature. Appendix III describes a typical four-point 
mission and serves to illustrate why the elimination of the automatic 
touchdown release is considered a safety feature. The complete hook 
assembly weighs 31 pounds. 

Isolator 


The four-point hoist isolator (or decoupler) is a nonlinear spring for 
which the spring constant increases as the applied lead increases. The 
isolator consists of two air-oil accumulators, a servo valve, a housing 
containing two pistons, and a load cell. Any relative motion of small 
amplitude between the load and the aircraft is absorbed by the two accumu¬ 
late re. The acctmulators receive and release hydraulic fluid into the 
chamber below the lower piston as it moves up and down relative to the 
housing. The resulting spring rate, therefore, is a function of the pneu¬ 
matic characteristics of the accumulators. Sudden load release is damped 
out by the movement of the tapered pin which is attached to the upper 
piston through a fixed orifice. 

The load position is maintained hydraulically by the action of the serve 
valve and isolator feedback linkage. 

The _ cvrulatore contain gages to permit check-out for proper precharging 
and a service valve to permit recharging as required. 

A separate lead cell is attached between the isolator and hoist attachment 
fitting, thus permitting field replacement without disassembly of the 
isolator. ?5grre 75* page 265, shows the isolator. 

The complete isolator assembly weighs 38 pounds. 


152 



CONTROLS AND INDICATOR SYSTEM 


» 


t 

* 

i 

} 

t 


| 


Four-point hoist and hook controls are available to the pilot and copilot 
and to the aft-facing pilot (hoist operator). In addition, a special con¬ 
trol box with a coil cord extension is provided for use b 7 a dismounted 
loadmaster. The master control for the hoist systems is located on the 
console between the pilots. It consists of a master switch, which ener¬ 
gizes either the single- or four-point system, and a station selector 
switch, which permits hoist operation by either pilot, copilot, aft-facing 
pilot (hoist operator), loadmaster, or all four. 

As in the single-point hoist system, the three-position, rocker-type switch 
located on all three collective pitch sticks allows the hoists to be 
raised, lowered, or stopped. The four-point hoist selector control is 
located as an extension of the pilots'and the aft pilot's collective pitch 
stick. The control consists of seven selector buttons. These buttons are 
marked to Dermit operation of hoists number 1, 2, 3> and 4; numbers 1 and 
3 (forward;; numbers 2 and 4 (aft); or all four hoists simultaneously’. 

The buttons are located in precise visual orientation with the heists to 
be operated, as shown in Figure 47, page 155, which is the view of the aft- 
facing pilot when operating the hoists. 

The cable length indicators are of the tape type and are spatially orien¬ 
ted with the appropriate hoist.* Cable lead indicators are of the dial 
type, to avoid confusion with the length indicators, and are also located 
so that they are oriented, by the eye, with the hoist whose load they in¬ 
dicate. 

The master control for the four-point hooks is located in the center con¬ 
sole between the pilots. It contains a station selector switch and a hook 
selector switch. The hook selector switch allows hook numbers 1, 2, 3, 
and 4 or all hooks to be operated. The actuation of the hook(s) is con¬ 
trolled by push-button switches on the cyclic sticks. 

Lights in the pilot's advisory panel indicate when the hook load beam is 
open. The aft pilot is provided with similar indicator lights. 

The free reel release lever (described on page 142) permits all four cable 
and hook assemblies to be jettisoned in the event of an emergency. ▲ 
guarded cable shear actuation switch is located in the overhead console 
between the pilots and permits all four cables to be cut simultaneously in 
the event of an emergency. A hoist selector switch spring loaded to the 
ALL position is included in the same panel. It also permits selection of 
any of the individual cables for shearing in event of an emergency when 
carrying individual hoist leads. A cable cutter test panel is also pro¬ 
vided to permit preflight checking of the firing circuit. Shear actuation 
controls are located on the bulkhead to the right of the aft-facing pilot* 

J 

'i 

I,* 

*This type of instrument correlates mere naturally with cable length 
than the dial type* 


153 








The dimounted loadmaster's control, shown In Figure 47» is a hand held 
control for both hoist and hook actuation. It consists ef seven hoist 
control selector push buttons and is similar to that available to the 
pilot and copilot. A toggle switch pemits the desired hoist(s) to be 
raised, lowered, or shut off. Four toggle switches, spring loaded to the 
OFF position, permit any of the four hooks to be opened. If all four are 
to be released at once, the "gang bar” is used to ensure simultaneous re¬ 
lease. 


J 


154 




CONTWL 


ENGINE TORQUE METER 


SINGLE - POINT 

CABLE LOAD INDICATOR 


SWGLE- POINT 

CABLE LENGTH INDICATOR 


MOOt SELECTOR 


9 9 

O aFT M 

'°o» -o 

5S O'- »? 


HOOK controls 


LOADMASTER 

CONTROL 


Figure 47* Controls and Indicators, Single- and Four-Point Hoists 










CABLE LOAD ifOCATO* 



CABLE LENGTH INDICATOR 


HOOK OPEN INDICATOR 


POUR - POINT 
INSTRUMENT DISPLAY 


HOIST SELECTOR BUTTONS 


FOUR- 
POINT ( 
HOIST V 
CONTROL 


CONTROL 

CONSOLE 






LOAD AND STRESS ANALYSIS 


INTRODUCTION 


The hoist components- evaluated herein have been designed to achieve a mini 
mum service interval of 3600 cycles or 200 hours of continuous operation. 
One of the design objectives as set forth in the contract was that the 
system shall have a minimum service interval of 1200 cycles. Defining a 
cycle as reeling in and reeling out all the available cable at full load, 
the minimum service interval of 1200 cycles is equivalent to 66.7 hours 
of operation for both the single- and four-point hoists. The hoist bear¬ 
ings are selected on the basis of a minimum B-10 life of 200 hours or 
static nonbrinell capacity, whichever is more critical. For the most part 
bearings on the cable load side of the VJeston brake are selected on the 
basis of static capacity, while those on the input side are selected on 
the minimum B-10 life requirement. 

The 200-hour service interval corresponds to 3600 cycles of operation as 
defined above. In actual operation, the load and cable travel will often 
be less than the maximum. The true service life of the hoist components 
should therefore exceed 3600 actual service cycles, and 200 hours should 
be used as the governing factor for overhaul. 

The selection of materials for the hoist components evaluated in this 
study is based on Sikorsky Aircraft's extensive test and production air¬ 
craft experience. All materials considered for the hoist are currently 
used in similar applications on production aircraft. 


DESIGN CRITERIA 
Gearing 

Material AMS 6260 (SAE 9310) Steel 


Spiral Bevel Gears 

Bending Stress, F^ = 

Compressive Stress, F c = 
Spur Gears 

Bending Stress, F^ = 

Bending Stress, F b = 
Compressive Stress, F c = 


30,000 psi 
200,000 psi 

36,000 psi (one-way bending) 
32,000 psi (reversed bending) 
150, OCX) psi 


157 


"*• ‘ *■' ■- »e 




Shafting 


Material AMS 6260 (SAE 9310) Steel 
F^ u * 136,000 psi 

AMS 5000 (SAE 4340) Steel 
F^ u »= 200,000 psi 

Bending Stress = 20,000 psi 

Torsional Stress = 30,000 psi 

Drums 

erial 7075-T6 Aluminum 

Compressive Stress, F ru = 72,000 psi (ultimate load) 

Housings 


Material AZ 91C Magnesium Casting 
ZK 60A Magnesium Forging 
7075 Aluminum Forging 

Planetary Carrier Plates 

Material 6AL - 4/ Titanium 

Bending Stress, F^ = 40,000 psi 

Slope, 0 « .0010 inch per inch 

Bearings 

All bearings used in the single and multi-point hoist components are an¬ 
alyzed by the methods of References 1, 2, and 13. The bearings are design¬ 
ed for a B-10 life of 200 hours or for static capacity, whichever is worse. 
Static capacity is checked with the cable at limit load. Under these con¬ 
ditions, the allowable load ratings of the bearings are as follows: 


p 

Rotating bearing, allow = 1.25 Co 

(29) 


p 

Monrotating bearing, allow =- 3 Co 

(30) 



where 


Co * Basic static load capacity of bearing 

Level wind drive bearings are designed for 200-hour B-10 life using loads 
derived from the power necessary to drive the level wind ball screw when 
the cable is at 30° side angle. Static capacity is checked using limit 
load conditions and 30° side angle. 


158 



SINGLE-POINT HOIST 




4 - 


t 


The sain drive train of the single-point hoist (Figure 71, page 257) con¬ 
sists of three stages of gearing. The 4.190/1 ratio first stage of gear¬ 
ing is a spur gear set whose pinion is driven through a Thomas coupling 
from drive shafting connected to the accessory gearbox. Torque flows 
through the input pinion and the input idler to the input gear. The out¬ 
put of the first stage gear drives the input side of the Weston brake. 

The Weston brake ie arranged to raise the load with all components driving 
as a unit, to lower the load in the reverse drive direction with the plates 
slipping, and to hold the load with the power off. The output of the Wee- 
ton brake is splined to a quill shaft connected to the input side ef the 
free reeling clutch. This clutch has drive plates that are preloaded by 
Belleville washers and contains a hydraulic cylinder that can compress the 
washers in the event of an emergency, thereby releasing the drive train 
and allowing the load and cable to strip off the drum. The output of the 
free reeling clutch is a quill shaft connected to the second stage 513A 
reduction ratio spur pinion and gear set. 

The third reduction stage consists of a 30.111 A ratio compound planetary 
with one fixed ring gear ana one output ri:t 2 g gear. The driving sun gear 
of this planetary is integral with the second stage gear shaft. Since the 
planetary plates carry no load, they are used only to position the plane¬ 
tary. The main drum is driven directly by the output ring gsar of the 
compound planetary. All other components, such as the level wind, slip 
rings, and cable length potentiometer are driven off the main drum through 
spur gears. 

The normally fixed input housing is isolated from the mounting structure 
by bearings allowing the reaction torque to be absorbed by a liquid spring 
load isolator. 


Design Data 

Normal cable load 
Limit cable load 
Held cable load 
Ultimate cable load 
Cable diameter 
Useful cable length 
Mean drum diameter 
Cable angle - static 

Cable angle-dynamic 

Input speed 

Overall reduction ratio 
1st stage spur ratio 
2nd stage spur ratio 
3rd stage confound 
planetary ratio 
Pitch line velocity 


40,000 lb 
100,000 lb 
115,000 lb 
150,000 lb 
1.39 inches 
100 feet 
34 inches 
± 30 c (starboard, 

+ 15° (starboard, 

3000 rpm 
443.218 to 1 
4.190 to 1 
3.513 to 1 


port) + 30 ® (forward) 

- 60° (aft) 
port) + 15® (forward) 

- 30° (aft) 


30.111 to 1 
60.2 fpm 


159 



Figure 48 is a schematic of the basic drive gearing arrangement 



Figure 48. Gearing Schematic, 
Single-Point Hoist. 


Drum Design 

In the Phase I Design Analysis section of this report the, the single-point 
hoist width and diameter were conservatively chosen at 15 inches and 39 
inches respectively for 100 feet of cable to maintain the single-rotor 
heavy lift helicopter's lateral cyclic stick movements within desirable 
limits, see page 18. A more detailed aerodynamic trim analysis, based on 
the 3-inch permissible control stick travel of Reference 10 ,* indicates 
that the allowable lateral C.G. shift is 9 inches to the right and 8.4 
inches to the left. Figure 49 shows the C.G. shift due to hoist loads. 

*Note: The longitudinal control displacement of 3 inches from the 
initial trim position is considered to be applicable to 
lateral trim conditions in the absence of a specific limita¬ 
tion for lateral stick displacement limits. 


160 





CO of AIRCRAFT 



EXTERNAL LOAD 


Figure 49. Center-of-Gravity Shift Due to 
Hoist Load At Maximum Limits of 
Cable. 


From Figure 49, 

it - Aircraft gross weight /ot) 

1 2 External load 

For an external load of 40,000 pounds, the single-rotor heavy lift heli¬ 
copter of Reference 4 has a gross weight of 79,071 pounds. Using the mini¬ 
mum permissible C.G. shift equal to 8.4 inches (to the left) and solving 
for 1^ we obtain 


161 





IfiWW 



h 

h 


8.4 


79.071 

40,000 


16.6 inches 


On the basis of this analysis, a drum diameter as small as 24*0 inches can 
be utilized. A drum mean diamste* of 34 inches has been chosen, however, 
to provide for good cable life and adequate space for the hoist gearing 
and housings. 


With this size drum, 12 cable wraps are required for 100 feet of cable. 
With the 12 active and 3 "dead" wraps spaced at a 1.5- inch pitch, the 
drum width is 22.5 inches. The total cable travel is 16 indies (or 9 
inches to right or left of the aircraft centerline). 

Utilizing the drum analysis of page 30, the drum thickness for a 34-inch 
7075 aluminum forged drum is 1*44 inches. 


Major Structural Members 

Figure 50 shows the location of the major structural bearings in the 
single-point hoist. 



Figure 50. Drum and Support Structures, 
Single-Point Hoist. 




i 

I 


162 




Cable elde loads are transmitted from the bellmouth, through the level 
wind ball screw, and into the level wind arm. On the main structure, the 
Timken bearing drum support reacts all the thrust loads from the level 
wind am. The end view shown in Figure 51 locates the load isolator and 
fore and aft maximum cable limits* 



P c 30° *H> 



60 ° APT 


Figure 51. Load Isolator and Support 

Structure, Single-Point Hoist. 


Table XXIII sunsarises the bearing reactions. A, B, C, and D, for various 
load conditions. 


163 



a 







Figure 52 ie a sketch of the input housing sheering the critical section 
and bearing reactions for the worst case load (cable out, 30° forward). 



1 


Figure 52, Input Housing, Single-Point Hoist. 


At critical section a-a, 


*i 

Z 

Z 


- 23 


- 22.625 


JT A* 

32 d 0 


i (23.00(A - 22.625 4 ) 

32 23.000 


165 




z 

m 

76.02 in. 3 

(32) 


V 

m 

9.9 R cr 



"br 

m 

9.9 (57,820) 

(33) 


**bT 

m 

572,420 




m 

9.9 RcH 



“bH 

m 

9.9 (36,680) 

(34) 


% 

m 

363,130 


« 

i 

i 

“b 

- 

*bv 


1 

! 

I 

*b 

- 

572,420 -H* 363,130 

(35) 


*b 

- 

677,880 in.-lb 



Using equation (6), we obtain 

f . . 6^880 

b 76.02 

f. - 8,920 pai 


Figure 53 shows the bearing reactions and critical section for the worst 
load condition (cable in, 30° forward) on the drun and support housing. 



Figure 53* Drum and Support Housing, 

Single-Point Hoist, 

, 

! 166 



At critical section a-a, 

d 0 - 14.2 

di - 12 

Using equation (32), we obtain 


z 

" 32 14.2 

z 

- 137.7 

*br 

- 11.9 8^ 

“by 

- 11.9 (93,510) 

*bv 

- 1,112,770 

*bH ' 

- 11.9 8jjn 

"bH ' 

- 11.9 (55,870) 

**bH 

- 664,850 

ng equation (35X we obtain 

■b 1 

- 1,112,770 4* 664,850 

"b 1 

- 1,296,250 in.-lb 


Using equation (6), we obtain 

- 9*410 psi 


. i&Lm 

137.7 


f b - 9*410 pal 
Meanting attachment loads 


Figure 54 is a scheaatic drawing of the hoist housings showing the 
■ounting feet locations. 















From a statical equilibrium analysis of the system, the Mounting foot 
loads are found to be 

R a « P c [ Y 2 2 ?8 9 ^ U-56 4 cos 0 - 1.632 sin 0) - .0820 (38) 

% = P c [ X 7 C 8 ° s e $ (cos 0 4 1.046 sin 9 -1) 4 .Q340 (39) 

Rp - P c (1.56 4 cos 0 - 1.632 sin 0) - 1.2360 (40) 

Rp “ P c [ ^ --- y^g 00 - 0 (cos 0 4 1.046 sin 0 -1) 4 .5170 (41) 

Foots A and C contain 2 bolts in each foot; hence, the bolt load ie found 
by dividing the reactions at A and C in half. It is assumed that foots A 
and B share the shear loads. The foot shear loads are given by 

S A - Sg - | J (sin 0 cos f6 4 sin 40?) 2 t (sin 0 sin 0) 2 (42) 

The worst case of bolt tension occurs in bolt D for cable out, zero side 
angle, 30° forward angle. Under these conditions the applied bolt load 
is 101,550 pounds. The total bolt load is given by 

P - KP. + Pi m 

where 

P a - applied load * 101,550 lb 

Pj_ “ initial bolt preload 

K - pet of applied load felt in the bolt 

For a flange thickness of 1.25 and a bolt diameter of .875, 

K - .295 

Pi - 30,000 lb (180,000 F tu bolt, 7/8 diameter) 

Using equation (43)» we obtain 

P - (.295) (101,550) 4 30,000 
P “ 59,960 lb-Maximum bolt load 
P allowable “ 86,100 lb 


169 


* "mil BH* 







The level wind ball acre* and loads an transmitted into the rigid drive 
half of the level wind am. The two level wind an bearings react all 
the moment caused by side cable loads and transfer the moment directly 
into the hoist side mounting plate. The worst case of stress in the 
level wind am occurs under ultimate cable load conditions and 30° side 
angle. Figure 55 shows the level wind side am and critical section. 





Figure 55. Critical Section, Level Wind 
Mechanism, Single-Point Hoist. 


170 




* 


» 


t 


At critical section AA, 
x - 3.461 

5 - 317 

Z - 57.3 

% - P (sin 0) 1 

Mb - (150,000) (sin 30°) (12.2) 

Mb «* 915,000 in.-lb (44) 


Using equation (6), we obtain 


fv . j l S iOO O 

b 57.3 


f b - 15,970 psi 

For a 7079-T6 aluminum forging, F^ u ■ 71,000 P»i 
F tu 


M.S. 


a 

fv 


-1 


MS ■» 71«000 -I 

M-S - 15,970 - 1 

M.S. - + 3.45 (45) 

The bending moment on the hoist centerline is given by equation(44): 

- (l50,000)(sin 30°) (21.5) 

- 1,612,500 in.-lb 

This moment is taken out by the two level wind ball bearings. 

p . !L 

brg i 


brg 


1.612 . 500 

11.5 


171 




P brg " HO,200 lb (46) 


The static capacity (Co) of these bearings is 82,000 pounds; therefore. 


P brg 

- 1.71 Co 

82,000 

(47) 

M.S. - 

** allowable 
© A 

(48) 


*brg 


Substituting 

in equation (48), 



* 


d 


M.S. 


-J-Co, 
1.71 Co 


M.S. - + .75 


The level wind bellmouth utilizes a screw to keep the cable tracking in 
the grooves of the drum. A ball screw is used to reduce friction and in¬ 
crease efficiency of the system. Reaction torque of the ball screw is 
provided by a fixed reaction pipe which also serves to stiffen the support 
structure. The basic ball screw data are given below: 


Screw diameter 


2 - 1/2 


Ball diamster 


3/8 


ThresH./inch 


2 


Lead 


.5 


No. of turns of balls 
Operating load 
Maximum static load 


7 

35>280 lb (Reference 11) 
196,000 lb (Reference 11) 


Since the drum pitch is 1.5 inches, the ratio from the drum to the screw 
is 


RR 


L screw 

*tlrum 


RR 



1 

3 


(49) 


* 


f 


172 




Hence the ball screw must turn three times faster than the drum. The 


axial loads felt by the screw are given by 

P a (normal) - P(normal) sin 0 


P ft (normal) 

« 4000 (sin 30°) = 20,000 lb 

(50) 

P a (max) 

= Pmax sin 0 ““ 


P a (max) 

~ 150,000 (sin 30°) » 75,000 lb 

(51) 


These loads are below the allowable loads for the ball screw as given in 
Reference 11 for 1 million inches of ball travel. For 12 wraps of cable, 
1 million inches of travel is equivalent to 27,800 cycles of hoist opera¬ 
tion. 

The screw must also be designed to avoid buckling as a column. 


L 

= 29.5 (distance between supports) 

d^ (effective) 

0 

« 2.31 

d i 

- 1.75 

I 

- .937 in. 4 


The critical buckling load for pinned ends is given by 

L 2 

* 2 (30 x 10 6 )(.937) 

(29.5 ) 2 

318,800 lb (52) 

The torque required to turn the screw against the axial load P a is given 
by 



T 

The efficiency 


* 

:k 



*a 1 

2 W7) 


(53) 


rf is conservatively assumed to be 90 pet (Reference 8): 


173 



20*000 ( .?? 

2 t(.9) 


1,770 in.-lb(at level wind ball screw) 

The scrub roll is a rubber coated roller that pulls the cable off the drum 
when lowering and is free wheeling when ra' ling the cable. The cable is 
loaded against the scrub drive roller by the scrub roll pulley which is 
adjustable to compensate for wear and to obtain the proper initial tension. 
The scrub roll pulley is mounted on the bellmouth and travels along the 
ball screw, keeping the same relative position with the cable as shown in 
Figure 56. 


^normal 

T 

1 normal 



Figure 56. Bellmouth, Scrub Roller,and Ball 

Screw Assembly, Single-Point Hoist. 

To provide a minimum tension of 50 pounds in the cable at all times, the 
normal force required on the pulley is found by 


n 


T 




Assuming that the coefficient of friction is .3, we obtain 


(54) 



174 


This force produces a torque on the scrub roller given by 


T 

F -i. 


» 2 

T 

167 

T 

230 in.-lb(torque required to drive scrub rolls) 

Weston Brake 



(55) 


The Weston brake is used to raise the load with all units locked, to hold 
the load with the input power removed, and to lower the load at the same 
speed as the motor. The important design considerations are adequate heat 
dissipation in the discs when lettering the load, the proper lead ar^le of 
the unlocking device to prevent self-locking if the angle is too low, and 
failure to lock if the angle is too high. For heat dissipation, the plate 
pressure must be lett. 



» 9.00 


d i 

- 6.00 


n 

= 7 friction surfaces 


T 

- 6430 in.-lb (40,000-lb cable load) 

The brake discs are SAE 1095 steel against high friction bronze. For 
these materials operating in oil, the coefficient of friction is 0.07. 

P a 

8 T 

r /i.d i (d Q 2 - dj 2 ) n 



8(6430) 


P a 

1r (,07)(6.00)(9.00 2 - 

6.00 2 )(7) 

P 

a 

«= 96.3 psi 

(56) 


P (allowable) -» 150 psi 




175 



Screw Data 


5 - 1 ^ triple thread 

lead = 1 = 2.25 
0 * " 4 ‘ 25 

The lead angle is given by 

a <= arc tan (— 7 ——) 

a = arc tan — rf^rr 

ir ( 4 . 25 ) 

a ** arc tan .16851 

a *= 9° 34' 

For proper operation (Reference 7)» 
6°< a < 12 0 


* 


(57) 

m 


Heat Riae in Weston Brake 

When the Weston brake is used to lower the load, all the energy of the 
load must be absorbed by the brake. This energy is the work done per 
revolution times the number of revolutions required to lower the load. 
Assuming that a 40,000 pound is being lowered 100 feet, we obtain 



where 


t = time to lower load, min 
L = length of cable, ft 
V = cable velocity, fpm 


( 59 ) 




1 


100 

"5o72 


1.661 min 


176 



Heat generated is given by 




t 


Btu (60) 

= energy expended in ft-lb 
\ = (2 tr T)(rpm)(t) (6l) 

where 

T - torque * 536 ft-lb 
rpm *= 716 

\ = 2 tt (536)(716)(1.661) 

\ - 4,010,000 ft-lb 

H - 4 ,010.«0 0 0 

778 

H * 5,150 Btu per Weston brake lowering operation 

The temperature rise after one lowering operation is 


= Jk 

778 

where 




At 


H 

Ob W b + Co W Q 


( 62 ) 


where 

At « temperature rise, °F 

= specific heat of brake parts = .12 Btu/lb/°F 
W b = weight of brake parts that will heat up, lb 
Co = specific heat of oil ** .55 Btu/lb/°F 
W Q *= weight of oil surrounding brake, lb 


While the drive train and surrounding castings weigh 589 pounds, it has 
been conservatively assumed that 150 pounds of metal and 25 pounds of oil 
which surround the Weston brake are the effective heat sink during a low¬ 
ering operation. Using equation (62Xwe obtain 


177 


i 


I 

1. 






At - _ 5150 

A (,12)(150) + (,55)(25) 

At « 162 °F 

The temperature rise is 162°F in one braking operation. Between opera¬ 
tions, the plates will cool by convection and radiation. 

Free Reeling Clutch 

The free reeling clutch is normally engaged by the axial load caused by 
the compression of a stack of Belleville washers. Since this clutch never 
slips, it is designed on static torque capacity and can have a high plate 
pressure. In addition, there will be very little oil on the plates and 
the friction torque will be governed by the static coefficient of friction. 
The larger Timken bearing carries the axial clutch load during normal 
operation but has no relative rotation between inner and outer races. The 
ball bearings used to prevent rotation of the hydraulic cylinder rotate 
during normal operation but carry no load. When the free reel clutch is 
disengaged, these bearings must withstand the axial load created by the 
hydraulic cylinder necessary to compress the Belleville washers and free 
the clutch plates. 

During free fall of the load, high rotational speeds are produced, causing 
dynamic tensile stresses in rotating parts. An analysis is made showing 
the effect of inertia on final speed after free fall and also the effect 
of stresses in critical parts due to the high rotational speed. 


T. . * T x 3.75 x F.S. 

design normal 

Assuming a factor of safety of 1.25, we obtain 


(63) 


design 


design 


6430 x 3.75 x 1.25 

30,140 in.-lb 

6.00 
4.00 

11 friction surfaces 
ft •= .25 (static) 

Using equation (56), we obtain 


n 


8 (30.140) _ 

(.25)(4.00)6.00 2 - 4.00 2 ) 11 


178 



V 


p a « 348 pai 

The axial clutch load necessary to produce this pressure is 
„ it Pa d i( d o “ d i) 

F a " - 2 - 

F « Z (348)(4«00)(6«00 - 4,00) 

f a 2 

F * 4370 lb (64) 

cl 

Belleville Washer Design (Reference 15) 

The Belleville washer must provide a preload of 4370 pounds on the clutch 
plates for proper torque. This load must be produced before the spring 
becomes flat so that further compression can take place in order to re¬ 
lease the clutch plates. The stack of Belleville washers is shown in 
Figure 57. 


f 


* 



Figure 57. Belleville Washers, Free Reeling 
Clutch, Single-Point Hoist. 


179 



(65) 




R 

r 

t 

n 


a 


- 3.00 

» 2.00 

- .120 

■= .156 

c x C E tA 
R 2 

where 


ie a function of 8/t and h/t and is given by a 
curve in Reference 15. 

C ie a function of R/r and is given by a curve in 
Reference 15. 

With the values of R/r - 2*00 “ ^ and c ** 1»9A substituted in 
equation (65), we obtain 


C - A370 (3.00) 2 

1 1.9A(30 x 10 6 )(.12r 

C ± - 3.26 

For three springe in parallel, 

C 1 - ^ - 1.09 

For this and ~ - 1.3, ^ - .7, 

t t 

8 - .7t - .08A 

For two springs in series, 

A «28 

A - (2)(.7)(.120> - .168 

The amount left for compression to release the clutch is 
clutch plate clearance * 2h - A 


( 66 ) 


* 




180 



clutch plate clearance «= 2( .156) - .168 

clutch plate clearance - .144 (67) 

To find the force required to flatten the springs and release the clutch, 

$ = h = 1.30 (68) 

t t 

C x - 1.42 

For three springs in parallel, 

C x - 3(1.42) 

C x = 4.26 

With these conditions the force required to flatten the springs is given 
by equation (65): 

r _ 4.26(1.94)00 X 10 6 )(.12) 4 

* (3.00) 2 

F - 5710 lb - Force required to flatten springs 

Drua Speed After Free Fall of Load 

The isolated drum and load are shown in Figure 58. The mass polar moment 
of inertia, J, of the drum includes all rotating internal parts from the 
drum to the free reeling clutch. These parts are related to the speed of 
the drum by the ratio of the speed squared. 



Figure 58. Free Falling of Load, 
Single-Point Hoist. 




181 



Zf 


ma 


(69) 

W-T 

- 

W 

— a 
g 


(70) 

ZM 


J a 


(71) 

TR 

“ 

Ja - J i 


(72) 

Here, the 

acceleration is due to gravity: a ■ g 


Also, 





a 

- 

R W T 


(73) 

S 

- 



(74) 

Solving for u> and eliminating time, 

t, and cable tension, T, 


U) 

„ 1 

2 V/ S 


(75) 

J 

r 2 ITT. 

8 R 2 




30 1 2 W S g 

final drum speed after fall 

(76) 

1 H“ttrum 

* J W R 2 + g J 

of weight V/ through distance 

S. 

J 

B 

4736 in.-lb/sec 2 

for all rotating parts of the single■ 


point hoist from the drum to the 
drum to the free reel clutch and re¬ 
flected to the drum speed. 


O O 

for R = 17, g 15 386 in./sec , and J ■* 4736 in.-lb/sec , 


30 

2 W S (386) 


rpm drum T 

N 

V (17) 2 + 386 (4736) 

• 

r-nm q CIO 1 2.67 w S 

r P“drum 7.549^1 w + 6326 

9 


Figure 59 shows a plot of drum speed increase factor versus distance of 
fall for various weights. 

If J = 0, the equation for RPM of the drum reduces to 


182 





rpadrum 



rp*Arm = 9.549 J 2.671 £ (77) 

As can be seen in Figure 59* when heavy loads are on the hoist and the free 
wheel unit is released, the drum inertia has little effect on the final 
rotational speed over that of a free falling body. 


The stress due to high rotational speed on a cylinder of constant thick¬ 
ness (Reference 6) is 


f 


r max 


0 + *) 

32 



(78) 


l t max 


p U) 2 
16 g 


(3 + v ) do 2 + (1 - 



(79) 


The free reeling clutch shaft is normally turning at 716 rpm. After free 
fall of 100 feet with a 40,000-pound cable load, the Bhaft is turning at 
53*104 rpm. The free reeling clutch output side reaction plate is the 
most highly stressed member under these conditions. 


For this plate, 
d Q = 6.00 

=0 

p * .263 lb/in. 3 

v ■= .3 

ui = rpm x — 

30 

« - 53,104 -*q- 

ut = 5,561 rad/sec 

Using equation (78), we obtain 


f 


r max 


, 0 

32 


( ,263)(5561 ) 2 

36S 


(6.00 - 0) 2 


(80) 


♦ 


t 


184 



f 


max 


84,160 psi 


Using equation (79i we obtain 

ft max - [ (3 + • 3)<6 - 00)2 + (1 - ' 3) (C)2 

f t max * 168 ' 300 P si 


The free reeling clutch output plate is made from AMS 5000 steel whose 
ultimate tensile strength is 200,000 psi and whose yield strength is 
176,000 psi. The maximum tensile stress produced in this part by high 
speed rotation is therefore below the yield strength. 

Gear Design 

The face width of the spur gears in the single-point hoist may be governed 
by bending stress or Hertz stress. The formulas for these stresses are as 
follows: 


1.5 W t h 
X F 


21 x 10 6 W t 


cf t a 


sin 2 0 F 'dp ~ d & 

The tangential tooth load, W^, is given by 


) 


(81) 

(+ for external gear) 

(- for internal gear) V ' 


W* 


2 T 
d 


(83) 


The torque, T, is found by dividing the torque at the drum by the appro¬ 
priate gear ratio (from the drum to the gear in question): 


T 


P d 
c m 

2 RR 


(84) 


Table XXIV summarizes the bending and compressive stresses for'all the 
spur gear teeth on the single-point hoist. Tho tangential tooth loads on 
the level wind gears are derived by finding the torque required to turn 
the level wind feed screw to overcome the axial load caused by a 30° side 
cable angle. Since the gear tooth ultimate tensile strength is greater 
than 3.75 x bending stress allowable, the lowest margins of safety occur 
during norma] operating conditions; hence the ultimate bending stresses 
have been omitted. 

Shaft bearing reactions caused by gear loads may be found by well-known 

• 185 





TABLE XXIV 
- SINGLE-POINT HOIST 


i 

I 

'1 

A 

\ 


f 

,< 


V 

i 


m 

N CO 

o*> © 
«h U U 
® x> 
X CO 



m 

n 


■P J) u-p 
*3 U C o 
+> O © 

wuW 


5 BS 

* 8£ a 

f-< Dl. 


x: 
® -p 

O TJ 
® ;rt 
tt, ^ 


•a-3 

Q 


XS 

£ 

.*s! 

Z o o ® 
z ® 
e-> 


o 

cm 

to 


a 


§ 

o 


' w 

8 S 


tn 

ca 


e 

o 

2 

•H 

u 

P 

P. 

CO 

! 


u, 

® 


8 


o o 

cr\ ir\ 

O' O' 4) 

« « « 

CO 

3 


% * 

S 3 


o 

ca 

cn 


4 3 fj 


8 

H 

CO 


O 

(V 

to 

CO 

cm 


I 8 8 8 g 8 R 
•» 
rH 

3 


ca 

•> 

O' 


O' O' 

A *k 

o o 

3 3 


3 


t'- 

•s 

o- 

3 


CO 


o 

O' 

CM 

* 

'O 

cm 


o 

a 


8 


co 


o 

IO 

04 


CO 


WWW 

& 3 & 

* 


rH 

CO 


•i 

o 

CO 


8 8 8 8 8 

4 4 >} n t\ 

rH H rH CA CA 


o 

o 

O 

2 o 

io 

io 

ca 

CO 

© 

CO CO 
CM CM 


t'- 

c- 

C*- 


NO 

CO 

to 

O 

CO 

8 

rH 

ITS 

CM 

rH 

rH 

04 

rH 

CM 

o 

rH 

O 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

rH 

rH 

rH 

H 

rH 

H 

rH 

rH 

rH 


C'- 45 O O CM CM CA 

KN (O 1A 4 « N O' 

cm o rj c*- x* 

H rH ai H rH 


8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

45 

CO 

H 

CA 

CO 

O'. 

C'- 

CM 

• 

CM 

• 

CA 

• 

CO 

• 

ca 

m 

n 

• 

O 


CfN 


13- 

fJ 


o o g o o 

rH rH iH rH rH 


-t 


IO 

04 


a 

cS 


„ * 
s. a 

CO CO 


c 

3 s 

ix, O 

^ S3 

Cu O, 


X, 

to 

V 

Cl 


c 

o 

•H 

■S 

a. 


to 

® 

bO 

® 


3 

a 

o 


c 

o 

•H 

c 

•rl 

(X 


a) 

•O 

c 

o 

o 



Is 

& 


o 

•* 

8 


o 

-4 

cm 

* 

O' 

rH 


O' t'- 
CM CM 


'O LA ir\ 

C'- O' CO O' 3- 

3 3 3 3 


u 

« 


o 

8 

rH 


o 

to 

C^ 

•v 

to 

rH 


§ 3 3 4 

CM 45 45 'O 


F} 


Q 

io 

o 

O 

co 

o 

io 

to 

io 

IO 

3 

O 

u\ 

O 

O- 

O' 

O 

3> 

to 

to 


to 

C^- 

IO 

45 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

04 

H 


CM 

H 


04 

rH 

04 

H 





O' 

IO 

IO 

io 

• 

• 

• 

• 

o 

sO 

O 

IO 

CM 

H 

rH 


IA 

CM 

• 

O 

O 

O 

C'- 

rH 

H 

rH 


O' 

C'- 

CM 

O 

04 

43 

04 

IO 

IO 

IO 

ca 

3 

f'- 

-4 

IO 

rH 

CA 

IO 

rH 

NO 

rH 

3 

IO 


X 

© 

s 


X 

Q 


§ ^ 3 © 

fc fr b fr fc S 5 £ 

© © © © © 3 |k ^ 


■P 03 

P 

& *2 

C/5 V 

•a S 

1 


8 

© 

3 

rH 

t 3 

c c 

C H 

H 

rH 

H 

H 

JS 

© « 

M CM 

CM (U 

CX 

0© 

(X 

04 

rH « 


186 


* 




1 





f 


methods, as shown in Reference 3. All bearing loads, ratings, and lives 
are tabulated in Tables XXV and XXVI for* normal and static conditions. 

Drive System Shafting 

The drive train shafts may be subjected to bending stresses, torsional 
stresses, or a combination of both. In bending, the hoist shafts are 
critical under normal load fatigue conditions, since the endurance limit 
multiplied by the ultimate load factor is less than the ultimate tensile 
strength of the material. In torsion, however, the shafts are critical 
under ultimate load conditions. The single-point hoist shafting has been 
analysed by the methods of Reference 3 and the results are given in Table 
XXVII. 

Cable 


The cable for the single-point hoist .is designed for a 150,000-pound ulti¬ 
mate load. This load is derived by the following method. 


ult - P limlt x F-S ' 

(85) 

limit " 1 <° Factor) 

(86) 


For the single-point hoist, the G Factor is 2.5 and the factor of safety 
for ultimate load conditions is 1.5. 

P limit * 40,000 (2.5) - 100,000 lb 

P ult “ l 00 * 0 ^ (1.5) - 150,000 lb 
The cable breaking load is given by 

P «= F tu KA (87) 

where 

K - Area Factor ■ .71 
A “ Total Area of all Strands 

For the single-point hoist, the wire diameter is .060 in. and the num¬ 
ber of wires is 342 (18 x 19 construction) 

A - No. of wires ^ 

4 

167 






TABI£ XXV 

OF BEARING LIVES AND LOADS - SINGLE-POINT HOIST 


I 


flta 


a 

P 

a 

P 

1 

I 

8 

nO 

8 

A 

§ 

§ 

8 

no 

§ 

o 

IA 

nO 

o 

CM 

VA 

r-\ 

H 



NO 

c? 

00 

00 

A 

8 

H 

H 










CA 

* 

rH 



o 

nO 

CA 

$ 

ca 

8 

nO 

8 

sO 

8 

NO 

o 

CA 

CA 

8 

NO 

8 

NO 

8 

nO 

8 

NO 

8 

8 

e- 

A 

A 

vo" 

nO 

a 

Cn- 


cy 

<y 

<y 

A 

A 


SMS 


8 8 8 8 8 8 

^ ^ ia ^ 

* * * * % * 

a s ^ a a a 


go's 3 

$8sS| 

s h s 1 

® -p a £ 

PQ Ctf P 


•S O H-ClS 

&-** g 

© -P cj £ 
pq oj p 


£ § § 
* * 
H H 


r\ ca H H 


w w \—/ ■ » 

3 3 £ 3 


£ g 


nO nO nO nO 


O O O 

ia >a o 

CM ca 

H P » 


o 

O 

O 

o 

g 

8 

O 

-a 

o 

00 

o 

IA 

CA 

-a 

•> 


•> 

*N 

CA 


IA 

IA 

O 

O 

o 

O 

00 

00 

CM 

CM 

& 

© 

8 

IA 

8 

IA 

CM 

CM 

CM 

CM 



«*"N 



& s 

M O 


v 

3 3 


■p w 
p 

a -p 


3 S S S S S 

& & & & & 

H M M M M 


188 


Notes: 1. Static loads are not felt from the input to the Weston brake 
2. Ary bearings not shown carry no load (or negligible load). 




t 


* 


t 

i 

I 

[ 

I 

1 

i 

I 

i 

i 



I I I 


§11 

* * a* 

C\ VO CO 

STS'5* 


o o o 


O o o 

•I «k «k 

4^AiA 


883! 

CO >A -4 < 

at * 

S IA 
sO 

o 


s 

CO 


o 

O 

os 

as 

CV 


o o i 

co r- ( 

IA < 

as as as as 

sO CA C"- -J 
rH 


8 

CO 


8888 8 

CO v© CO E“- o 

•s »S as - as 

'O n o -4 \o 

IA -4 

* 

O O O Q O 

IA (A IA Q Q 
<A (-f (S CO O 

* as * * 

■4 H H A- 

s 


sO 

H 

IA 


8 

IA 

* 

CA 

CA 


8 


o 

8 

8 

c-- 

•s 

8 

rH 


O 

8 

a* 

O' 

-4 


8 

IA 


O' vO 
-4 H 


O 

IA 

CM 

* 

sO 


o 

fs- 

CV 


8 

Os 


8 


o 

IA 

sO 

•a 

IA 

-4 


O O 


8 


•s 

o 

IA 


O 

-4 

(A 

as 

sO 

CA 


o 

IA 


o o g o 

4«AO N 

8 

8 

o 

CA 

0 0) 
.5 i 

O O O C- -4C--CA 1 

•k 

1 NO 

* 

cw 

•k 

IA 

■a 

*5 | 


CO 

r-t 


o o o o 

caF^F^ o o 8 

•s as as as 

-4 VA IA o 

cv 


O I 


as 

o 

cv 



® [3 " 


gpecffe e 

m JU OQ ^ CQ ^ CQ 

o c 

I I 


§ 

o 

■a 

© 
• 43 

K 

3 % 

O 4-5 

(0 Cd 

(D ^ 
•rl O 

c ^ 

O O 
■P 

(0 to 
•H <D 
ft S> 

H H 



I 

3ii 

hJ| 

g 

O 



4 
O S 
Vi E +> 

U (X. *5 *3 "O O <H 2 

cd n -o o o 

5 | iaS^?) 

HH 

“asSS-SSS^Sl 

cd _ «H © 

.H ® co © © o) ,5 

© P. H © _ hhh 


9 W 

s .3 


’■? £& 


•S "3 •§ 


(c.aC+’hsAOOO 


I 


H CV (A -4 kAsO O CO 


n 

v 

I 


189 


n. 

: .*Jf 







j 

.? 

j 

k 

A = 18 x 19 x -f- (.060) 2 

4 

A - .967 in? (88) 

F t - 250,000 psi 

P «= (250,000)(.71)(.967) 

P ® 171»600 pounds - cable breaking strength 

SINGLE-POINT HOIST DRIVE SYSm 


Clutch-Reverser Unit 


« 




The clutch-reverser unit is the power source and directional control for 
the single-point hoist. Power is taken from the accessory gearbox to 
which the clutch-reverser unit is mounted. The 1.364 to 1 reduction gear¬ 
box consists of three mutually geared shafts, two of which contain hy¬ 
draulic clutches as shown in Figure 72. One clutch is used for raising 
the load while the other is used for lowering the load. The hydraulic 
control system prevents both clutches from simultaneously engaging. 

Design Data 


Input rpm 
Output rpm 
Reduction ratio 
Input torque 
Horsepower 


5995.2 

4396.5 

1.364 to 1 
957 in.-lb 
91 


(40,000-lb cable load) 


The gear tooth bending and compressive stresses are found by methods simi¬ 
lar to those used in the single-point hoist and are sunnarized in Table 
XXVIII, page 193. 

Bearing loads and lives are found by methods similar to those of Refer¬ 
ence 3* AH bearing loads, ratings, and lives are tabulated in Table XXIX, 
page 194,for the clutch-reverser unit. 


Clutch Analysis 

Both the load lifting and load lowering clutches of the clutch-reverser 
unit are identical in design. The load lowering clutch can have a much 
small er capacity than the load lifting clutch, since it must only over¬ 
come friction in the system. The units are made identical because of 
cost and assembly reasons, since their weight is small. 

The clutches are hydraulically actuated by a supply pressure d 250 psi. 
The axial load is given by 


i 

I 

I 

fk 

7 


■ U 

I 


191 





p, ■ pa (89) 

where 

P - pressure ■ 250 psi 
A « piston area - 7.903 in. 2 
F a - 250 (7.9Q3) 

F a - 1980 lb 

The torque capacity is given by 

T “ -jr" (d 0 + d i )n (90) 

where 

d Q - plate outside diameter = 3.82 
d^ “ plate inside diameter « 2.00 
n * number of friction surfaces *• 16 
fi ■ coefficient of friction ■ .07 dynamic (Reference 5) 

T - . Ct°7J (3.82 + 2,00)(l6) 

4 

T - 3220 in.-lb 

On the low-speed (4396.5 rpm) sliaft,this torque is equivalent to 224 horse¬ 
power which is well above the 94 horsepower design criteria even when using 
the very conservative coefficient of friction of .07. 

Using equation (56), the plate pressure at a torque of 3220 in.-lb is 


8 (3220) _ 

ir (, 07 )( 2 . 00 )( 3 . 82 2 - 2.00 2 ) 16 


P a - 366 psi 

The clutch plates are lubricated by a constant oil supply and only slip 
during acceleration of the load. 


192 







Upper Angle Gearbox 

The upper angle gearbox (Figure 72) is mounted directly on the output of 
the clutch-reverser unit. The 1.172 to 1 reduction ratio le accomplished 
by a single set of spiral bevel gears which turn the drive shaft downward 
and sideward toward the hoist angle gearbox. 

Spiral Bevel Gear Data 


0 

* 

"p 

<*P 


F 


*P 


Shaft angle = 139° 30' 

Pressure angle - 20° 

Spiral angle » 35° 

Diametral pitch « 6 

Number of teeth in pinion ■= 29 

Pitch diameter of pinion - 4.833 

Number of teeth in gear «= 34 

Pitch diameter of gear « 5.667 

Face width - .86 

Contact ratio ■ 1.35 


Table XXX summarizes bearing lives for the four tapered roller bearings 
in the reverser output angle gearbox for 40,000-pound cable load. 




% 


table XXX 

BEARING LIVES AND LOADS- 
UPPBt ANGLE GEARBOX 


Location 

Loads(Pounds) 

Basic 

Radial 

Rating 

Life 

(Hours) 

Thrust 

Radial 

Radial 

Equivalent 

Input Pinion, Gear End 

483 

1070 

1455 

1800 

662 

Input Pinion, Input End 

0 

238 

711 

865 

700 

Output Gear, Gear End 

216 

1110 

1356 

1240 

1020 

Output Gear, Output End 

0 

400 

400 

510 

5250 


195 



Lower Angle Gearbox 


The lower angle gearbox (Figure 72) ie Mounted on the airframe near the 
hoist input. A drive shaft connects the input to the output of the rovers- 
er angle gearbox, while another drive shaft connects the output to the 
hoist input pinion. The 1.25 to 1 reduction ratio Is accomplished by a 
single set of spiral bevel gears. 

Spiral Bevel Gear Data 


a 

0 

* 


% 


"p 


Shaft angle 
Pressure angle 
Spiral angle 
Diametral pitch 
Number of teeth in pinion 
Pitch diameter of pix.ion 
Number of teeth in gear 
Pitch diameter of gear 
Face width 
Contact ratio 


= 80° 

«=■• 20 ° 

- 35° 

= 6 

*= 20 
»= 3.667 

- 25 

■= 4.167 

= .88 

- 1.40 


* 


Table XXXI summarizes bearing lives for the four tapered roller bearings 
in the hoist input angle gearbox for 40,000-pound cable load. 


table xxii 

BEARING LIVES AND LQADS- 
. Wm AMPLE GEARBOX 


Location 

Loads (Pounds) 

Radial 

_Thrust Radial_Equivalent 

Basic 

Radial 

Ratine 

Life 

(Hours) 

Input Pinion, Gear End 

895 

1625 

2852 

12,020 

540 

Input Pinion, Input End 

0 

705 

1646 

7,870 

800 

Output Gear, Gear End 

875 

1.810 

3140 

11,910 

476 

Output Gear, Output End 

0 

873 

1329 

6,140 

903 


196 




FOUR-POINT HOIST 


The main drive train of the four-po:.nt hoist consists of four stages of 
gearing as shown ii, Figure 73, page 261. A hydraulic motor drives the 
first stage spur pinion, idler, and gear of reduction ratio 4.517 to 1. 

The first stage ge-r shaft drives the input section of the Weston brake. 

As in the single-point hoist, the Weston brake turns as a unit when rais¬ 
ing the load, slips at the same speed as the input when lowering the load, 
and holds the load with the input power off. A hydraulically powered free 
reel clutch similar to that used in the single-point hoist permits the 
hook and cable assembly to be jettisoned in the event of a hook release 
malfunction. It is located between the Weston brake and the second stage 
spur pinion. The second stage of gearing is a 6.273 to 1 reduction ratio 
spur pinion gear. A conventional planetary (sun gear driving, rin^ gear 
fixed, cage output) third stage of 4.9Q3 to 1 reduction ratio is driven 
from the second stage gear. The output cage of the third stage planetary 
drives the sun gear of the 3.702 to 1 reduction ratio fourth stage con¬ 
ventional planetary whose output cage is bolted directly to the drum. 

The level wind ball screw is rotated by a chain drive whose drive sprocket 
is attached to the drum side plate. The main support is a two-way swivel 
arrangement which does not allow the transmission of ary moment loading 
into the airframe. A hydraulic load isolator is mounted between the air¬ 
frame and hoist to dampen load oscillations. 

Design Data 


Normal cable load 

= 

11,550 lb 

Limit cable load 

m 

32,300 lb 

Yield cable load 

m 

37,200 lb 

Ultimate cable load 

m 

48,500 lb 

Cable diameter 

B 

.79 in. 

Useful cable length 

- 

50 ft 

Mean drum diameter 

B 

22.19 in. 

Cable angle (static) 

B 

+ 30 ° (any direction) 

Cable angle (dynamic) 

B 

+15° (ary direction) 

Input speed 

■ 

2750 rpm 

Overall reduction ratio 

B 

514.356 

1st Stage spur ratio 

B 

4.517 

2nd Stage spur ratio 

■ 

6.273 

3rd Stage planetary ratio 

■ 

4.903 

4th Stage planetary ratio 

B 

3.702 

Cable pitch line velocity 

- 

31.06 fpm 


Drum 

The drum for the four-point hoist has a mean diameter of 22.19 inches and 
a length of 10.5 inches. The analysis of this component is summarized 
in Table VIII, page 30. 




197 



Major Structural Members 


i 


Figure 60 shows the location of the major structural bearings in the four- 
point hoist. 



Figure 60* Major Structural Members, 
Feur-Peint Heist* 


Cable loads are transmitted to the side plates as tensile loads. No 
thrust can be transmitted because of the zero-moment mounting. 


From a consideration of static equilibrium, 


Ra 

«b 

Ra 

Rb 


- .0667P e ) „ .. T 

- 1.0667P e ) Cable ** 

■ ^AAAAPj j Cable Out 


(91) 

(92) 



The minimum cross section on the side of bearing 6 is shown in Figure 61 • 


% 


« 


198 




2.75 



Figure 61. Side Plate, Four-Point Hoist. 


At section a-a, 

base ■ 6.5 

height « 1.5C 


for P, 


- 2.438 

- 2.75 Hg 

- 48,500 lb (ultimate load) 

- 2.75 (1.0667) (48,500) (cable in) 


“b 

From equation (6) 


142,300 in.-lb 


. 142x200 

2.438 

- 58,370 psi 


199 



The level wind mechanism In the four-point hoist has axial forces Induced 
due to the angle of the cable when it is in its limit positions. This 



Figure 62. Induced Axial Loads in Level Wind 
Ball Screw, Four-Point Hoist. 

From Figure 62, 

tan 0 - | (97! 

P a - P c sin 0 (98] 

For small angles sin 0 ~ tan 0 , 

P- - P r | (99] 

I - 3.5 in. 

T - 35.35 in. 




P a 

35.35 

P a 

.099 P c 

P a normal “ 

.099 (11,550) 

P a normal 

1140 lb 

p a ult 

.099 (48,500) 

p a ult 

4800 lb 

Ball screw data 



Ball circle diameter 
Ball diameter 
Lead of thread 
Turns of balls 
Operating load 
Max static load 


- 1.5 

- 5/32 

- 1/4 

- 5 

* 5240 lb (Reference 11) 
= 31,500 lb (Reference ll) 


The normal load is less than the operating load for 1 million inches of 
travel, as shown in Reference 11. One million inches of travel in the 
four-point hoist corresponds to 71,430 cycles of operation (3830 hours). 

The ratio from the drum to the ball screw is given by equation (49). 



Hence the ball screw must turn 3.5 times as fast as the drum to keep the 
bellmouth of the level wind in the same relative axial position as the 
cable takeoff point on the drum. 

If we assume that the ball screw shaft is singly supported, the critical 
buckling load can be found from equation (52). 

L 


*i 


15 

1.4 (effective) 
.90 


201 





I - .1564 in. 4 

P . iP. xio 6 

(15) 2 

P » 206,OOO-lb screw buckling load 

The torque required to turn the screw against the 1140-pound normal load 
is given by equation (53). 


V 

■ .90 (Reference 8) 

T 

. 1140 (.25) 

normal 

2 ir (.90) 

T normal 

« 50.4 in.-lb 


The scrub roll is a rubber coated roller whose pitch line velocity is 9.8 
pet greater than the cable pitch line velocity when the cable is reeling 
out. A one-way clutch disengages the roller when the cable is reeling in. 

An adjustable pulley, which rides with the bellmouth and ball screw, is 
used to load the cable against the scrub roll rubs on the cable, keeping 
a slight tension in it to keep ths cable tracking in the drum grooves when 
the hook is unloaded. 

Weston Brake 

The Weston brake in the four-point hoist is similar in design to the 
Weston brake in the single-point hoist. The lining and screw data are 
given below: 

d Q - 5.25 

d A - 3.25 

n « 6 friction surfaces 

/a - .07 * 

T - 1130 in.-lb (11,550-lb cable load) 

Prom equation (56), 


p ._8 1U 10J_ 

8 tt (.07)(3.25)(5.25 2 - 3.25 2 ) 6 

P a - 124 psi 


202 



Screw data: 


2£ - 3 triple thread 
lead *= 1 * .3333 
d* - 1.917 

The lead angle, a , is calculated using equation (57). 
a =■ arc tan 2 . (?23 . 233 2 

a - arc tan .166Q3 

a » 9 ° 26 * 

This value meets the requirement for proper operation as given by 
equation (58). 

Heat Rise in Weston Brake 


When the Weston brake is used to lower the load, all the energy of the 
load must be absorbed by the brake. This energy is given by the work done 
per revolution times the lumber of revolutions required to lower the load. 
For a 11,550-pound load being lowered 50 feet at 31.06 fpm,the time to 
lower is calculated using equation (59). 


» 


* 


Heat generated is given by equations (60) and (61). 

H . 2 ir (94.2)(608.6)(l.61) 

778 

H - 746 Btu 

It has been conservatively assumed that 50 pounds of metal and 10 pounds 
ef oil which surround the Weston brake are affected by heat when lowering 
the load. The temperature rise after one lowering operation is calculated 
using equation (62). 


At 

At 


.12 (50) + .55 (10) 
65°F 


203 





Free Reeli ng Emergency Release 


As in the single-point hoist, an emergency free reel release has been pro¬ 
vided. This unit is a clutch whose plates are axially loaded by Belleville 
waehers. A hydraulic piston compresses the washers to release the clutch 
plates. The clutch is designed to carry the ultimate cable loa' 1 with a 
factor of safety of 1.25. 


^design 


P d* 
2 RR 


x F. S. 


^design 


48.500 (22.19) 
2 (113.86) 


x 1.25 


1 design 


5,910 in.-lb 


( 100 ) 


o 

d i 

n 


3.00 

2.00 

14 friction surfaces 
.25 (static) 


Using equation (56), we obtain 

P _ 8 (W10) 


ir (.25)(2.00)(3.00 2 - 2.00 2 ) 14 

434 psi 


The axial clutch load necessary to produce this pressure is given by 
equation (64). 


T.(4?AK 2 t°Q) ( 3,00 - 2.00) 


1360-lb axial load required by Belleville washers 


The Belleville washers design for the four-point hoist is similar to the 
Belleville washer design for the single-point hoist. The same stacking 
arrangement is used: two sets in series of three washers in parallel for 
each set. Using the nomenclature of Figure 57, page 179, the data and 
results are as follows: 


204 



9 


« 




R - 1.88 
r = 1.06 
t = .069 

h = .103 

C - 1.57 

C x « 1.50 

8 - .050 

A * .100 


Clutch plate clearance = .106 

V.'ith these values substituted in equation (65) the force required 
to flatten the springs is 1450 pounds. 

Drum Speed After Free Fall 

By substituting appropriate values in equation (76), the curves shown by 
Figure 63 have been plotted to show the ratio of rpm before and after fall 
versus distance of fall for various cable loads. 

As was the case in the single-point hoist, in the four-point hoist the 
inertia has little effect over that of a free falling weight, when the 
weight is large. 

The free-reeling clutch shaft is normally rotating at 608.8 rpm. After 
free fall of 50 feet with a cable load of 11,550 pounds, the free reeling 
clutch shaft will be rotating at 65,780 rpm. At this high speed, rota¬ 
tional stresses will be induced into the outer clutch plate holder (larg¬ 
est member on shaft). For this part, 

d 0 *= 3.90 

d A *= 3.25 

p = .283 lb/in. 3 

v ■ .3 

Using equation (80),we obtain 


u> - 65780 - 

6886 rad/sec 

Solving equation (78), we 

obtain 

f = (L+ .t 21 

(.283)(6888) 

r max 32 

38<i 

f rmax ' 1520 psi 



(3.90 - 3.25) 2 


205 



RPli 



DISTANCE OF FALL, INCHES 


Figure 63. Load vs Free Fall Velocity, 
Four-Point Hoist. 






Solving equation (79), we obtain 


*t max 

f 

t max 


[(3 + .3)(3.90) 2 + (1 - .3 X 3.25) 2 ] 

125,200 psi 


The free reeling clutch output plate is made from AMS 5000 steel whose 
ultimate tensile strength is 200,000 psi and whose yield strength is 
176,000 psi. The maximum tensile stress produced in this part by high¬ 
speed rotation is therefore below the yield strength. 


Gear Design 

The bending and compressive stresses in the gear teeth of the four-point 
hoist are found by methods similar to those used on page 185 for the 
single-point hoist. The level wind drive for the four-point hoist is a 
chain and sprocket arrangement and is covered in another section. Tabie 
XXXII summarizes the bending and compressive stresses for all the spur 
gear teeth on the four-point hoist. 

Planetary Plate Design 

The planetary carrier plates of the third and fourth stages of gearing in 
the four-point hoist are subjected to steady bending stresses. 6AL-4V 
titanium is used because it is lighter than steel plates. The plates may 
be designed for maximum slope or maximum stress. The allowable stress 
and slope is given below: 


f b allow " 40,000 psi 
0 allow " .001 inch per inch 
Plate stress is given by 


*b 

where 

T 


12 T L 

n d s 1 ^0 " d i " 1,2 d ) 



■ sun gear torque 
- geometry factor 


1 


2 


■8d 


* sun gear diameter 


( 101 ) 


( 102 ) 




TABLE XXXII 

GEAR SUMMARY - POUR-POINT HOIST 


I 


5 


b ^ H 3 

+> 6 3 o 

Lq 43 la © 

|S) • TJ UN r-i 

?M:J3 


03 

N 03 


© «P 

X co 


SP» 

•H in 

E 2 

© -p 
cq oi 




a fn 
( 0*0 
« U 41 
c o 

-P O a) 

CO O fc, 


.c a o 

■p G -P 
X o o o 
o a «d 
E-I a 


X 
4> -P 
O X) 

a oj -H 
& 


« si 

*■§** 


H Eh 


Q 

O 

O 

Q 

Q 

Q 

O 

0 

Q 

Q 

O 

O 

O 

4 

O 

O 

O 

O 


0 

O 

O' 

rH 

H 

cn 



CK 

O' 

cn 

O' 

O' 

O' 

* 


* 



* 

•» 

•«. 

*» 



0 

C"- 

O' 

O' 

O' 

O' 

O' 

0- 

O' 


CM 

c\f 

r| 

cv 

rH 

O' 

3 

4 

3 

3 

0- 

4 

■4 

rH 

O' 

§ 

rH 

0 

O 

0 

O 

O 

0 

0 

0 

Q 

O 

CO 

rH 

8 

$ 

£ 


£ 

CO 

'O 

3 

O 

O' 

cn 

-4 

•» 

* 

* 

* 

* 

•N 

* 

•l 

•» 


•V 

c*- 

0 

45 

on 

LA 

C-- 

CM 

'O 


LA 

O' 

rH 

rH 

H 

cn 

CM 

CM 

CM 

rH 

CM 

CM 

rH 

3 

45 

NO 

O 

O 

O 

O 

0 

O 

O 

0 

10 

CO 

0 

O 

CM 

3 

CM 

LA 

LA 

LA 

cm 

CM 

CM 

r- 

t> 

4 

-4 

LA 

LA 

LA 




rH 

rH 

H 

rH 

H 

CM 

CM 

CM 

CO 

CO 

O 

45 

0 

LA 

'O 

45 

0 

O' 

•4 

cn 

cn 

LA 

on 

LA 

CM 

CM 

cn 

CM 

rH 

cn 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

P 

• 

• 

rH 

rH 

H 

H 

rH 

H 

rH 

rH 

rH 

rH 

rH 

Ht 

-4 



-4- 


CM 

CM 

LA 

4> 

O' 

O 

O'- 

b 

O 

n 

O 

c-- 

s 

rH 

• 

-4 

LA 

LA 

O 

• 

LA 

O 

• 

O 

• 

LA 

O 

• 

s 

• 

• 

& 

• 

3 

• 

O 

rH 

• 

0 

H 

• 

<0 

CO 

0 

0 

0 


rH 

CO 

LA 

CO 

O 

LA 

LA 

m 

O' 

O' 

cn 

rH 

LA 

45 

LA 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 




H 

H 

rH 

rH 

rH 

rH 

H 

H 

LA 

m 

LA 










cv 

rH 

0 - 

CO 

LA 

C"- 

in 

CM 

© 

O 

LA 

© 

8 

3 

8 

CO 

CO 

H 

on 

45 

LA 


0 


O 

0 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

«H 

rH 

CO 

H 

CO 

CM 

cn 

O 

rH 

-4 

-4 

cv 

rH 

45 

nO 

45 

45 

45 

CM 

Pi 

CM 

O 

0 

0 

1 rH 

rH 

rH 

H 

H 

rH 

rH 

rH 

rH 

rH 

8? 

8? 

H 

CM 

CO 

H 

LA 


0- 

0 

0 - 

a 

CM 

a 

m 

-4- 

Ai 

H 

-4 

-4 

rH 








p 











cd 



cd 






3 


© 



© 




C 


3 

C 

O 

0 

© 

O 

c 

0 

0 




0 



•rj 



■H 

hO 




*H 

u 

c 

2 

d 

C 

c 

q 




C 

cd 

3 

•H 

•H 

3 

•rl 


c 



•H 

V 

CO 

CU 

a 

CO 

a 

a 

0 



a 

0 






© 




• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

d 

rH 

3 

p 

5 . 

c 

c 

c 

c 

c 

c 

1 *H 

T> 

H! 

© 

0 

3 

3 

3 

3 

ed 

© 

3 

3 

Ph 

a 

a 

H 

rH 

rH 

rH 

rH 

H 




CO 

CO 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

£ 

3 

3 

© 

0 

V 

© 

© 

V 

© 

© 

a 

a 

a 

uo 

50 

M 

too 

too 

too 

60 

bO 

CO 

00 

cn 

cd 

cd 

cd 

cd 

cd 

cd 


nJ 




■p 

■p 

•p 

-p 

-p 

■p 

■P 


-B 

-B 

B 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

& 

& 

a 

c 

E 

c 

E 

E 

E 

si 

■p 

X! 

■P 

s: 

M 

H 

M 

CM 

CM 

cn 

cn 

cn 

-4 

-4 

•4 


» 


I 


A 


208 




I 


t 




1 

n 

d P 

d 

g 

t 

d o 

*i 


= (d s + dp) sin I 
*= number of pinions 
«= pinion diameter 

*= O.D. of inner race of pinion bearing 
= distance between plates 
*= thickness of single plate 
** outside diameter 
*= inside diameter 


(103) 


Plate slope is given by 
0 -_16 TL3 


n d„ E r (d_ - d, ) 


(* +_t) 


(104) 


where the symbols are the same as those used for the stress formula. 
For the 3rd stage planetary, 
g *= 1.50 in. 

t ■= 7330 in.-lb ( 11 , 550 -lb cable load) 

d B - 2.583 in. 

d p * 3.75 in. 

n *= 4 pinions 

d *=2.31 in. 

1 *= 4.478 in. 

L *= 1.315 in. 

d 0 *= 9.84 in. 

d A - 2.75 in. 

t *> .28 in. 

E ■= 16x10^ psi 

Substituting in equation (101),we obtain 




209 


(12 )(7330)( 1.315) 

(u)(2.5^)(i:mW.& -2.75 - 1.2 X 2.31) 


(1.50 + 28) 
(.28)2 



f b - 

13,140 psi 

Substituting in equation (104) we obtain 

d m 

(16)(7330)(1.315)3 

r 

(4)(2.583)(16 x 10 6 )(4.478) 2 (9.84 - 2.75) 

t - 

.00092 inch per inch 

For the 4th stage planetary, 

g 

- 1.83 in. 

T 

- 35,960 in.-lb (11,550-lb cable load) 

d s 

» 4.700 in. 

"P 

4.000 in. 

n 

- 6 pinions 

d 

- 2.18 in. 

1 

= 4.350 in. 

L 

- 1.303 in. 

d o 

- 12.375 in. 

d i 

~ 5.000 in. 

t 

» .36 in. 

E 

■ 16 x l(fi psi 

Substituting 

in equation (I0l),we obtain 


(12)(35,960) (1,303) 

r b 

(6)(4.70)(4.35X12.375 - 5.0 - 1.2 x 2.18) 

f b " 

16,280 psi 

Substituting 

in equation (104), we obtain 

d 

_(16)(35,9&Q)(I«3<S) 3 _ 


(6)(4.70)(16 x 10 6 )(4.350 ) 2 (12.375 - 5.00) 


xi*aa ± 86) 

(.28)3 


1 1, 63 ± ^361 

(.36) 2 


LL& t .36) 

(.36)3 




210 




0 « .00095 inch per inch 

Level Wind Drive Chain 


The level wind drive chain ie designed for a normal torque of 50.4 inch- 
pounds. The chain and sprocket data are given below: 


Nunber of Teeth in Drive Sprocket 

- 

63 

Number of Teeth in Driven Sprocket 

- 

16 

Diameter of Drive Sprocket 

«= 

7.560 

Diameter of Driven Sprocket 

American Standard Chain #35 

r= 

2.160 

Chain Pitch 

as 

.375 

Average Tensile Strength 

= 

2100 lb 

Rated HP for 17-Tooth Sprocket 

K 

.061 

Correction Factor for 18-Tooth Sprocket 

XZ 

1.05 

RPM of Driven Sprocket 

» 

18.7 


% 


HP - 


Txro 

63 , 025 ' 


hp - IQAl M ifl 
63,025 

HP - .015 (105) 

This is well belcw the allowable HP of .061 from Reference 12 for 15,000 
hours of chain life. The maximuii tensile load in the chain is given by 


max 


2 T normal / p cable ult \ 

J ' p ' 

r cable normal 


‘max 


2 (50.4) 

2.160 


( 46,500 ) 

(11,550) 


P max " 196 lb (106) 

This is well below the average tensile strength given in Reference 12. 

Bearing Design 


Shaft bearing reaction caused by gear loads may be found by well-known 
methods, as shown in Reference 5. All bearing loads, ratiigs, and lives 
are tabulated in Table XXXI V for normal and static ultimate conditions. 

Drive System Shaft Stresses 

The drive train shafting of the four-point hoist may be subjected to bend¬ 
ing stresses, torsional stresses, or a combination of both. In bending, 

211 


? 


.'fc 


n- 

S 


J 


m 





the hoist shafts are critical under normal load fatigue conditions, since 
the endurance limit multiplied by the ultimate load factor is less than 
the ultimate tensile strength of the material. In torsion, however, the 
shafts are critical under ultimate load conditions. The four-point hoist 
shafting has been analyzed by the methods of Reference 3> and the results 
are given in Table XXXIII. 


TABLE XXXIII 

CRITICAL SECTION SHAFT STRESSES - FOUR-POINT HOIST 


Location 

Critical Section 

T^rpe of 
Critical 
Stress 

Stress 

(psi) 

M.S. 

Input Pinion Shaft 

Output Pinion Brg. Rad. 

Bending 

5,770 

2.47 

Input Idler Shaft 

Bearing Radius 

Bending 

8,030 

1.49 

Input Gear Shaft 

Spline Undercut 

bending 

1,100 

17.18 

Free Reel Clutch 
Input 

Torque Shaft 

Torsion 

21,070 

3.13 

Free Reel Clutch 
Output 

Torque Shaft 

Torsion 

57,610 

.51 

2nd Stage Pinion 
Shaft 

Bearing Radius 

Bending 

8,930 

1.24 

2nd Stage Gear 

Shaft 

Webb Connection 

Bending 

12,280 

.63 


Note: Torsional stresses are critical under ultimate load 
conditions. 


Cable Breaking Strength 

For the four-point hoist the G factor is 2.8 and the factor of safety for 
ultimate load conditions is 1.5. Using equation (85) to determine the re¬ 
quired cable breaking strength, we obtain * 

P ult " 11,550 ( 2 *8)( 1 »5) = 48,500 lb 

The cable to be used has 342 wires (18 x 19 construction) that are .035-in. ' 

diameter. Solving equation (88) to determine cable area,we obtain 

A = 18 x 19 x -j- x .Q35 2 = .329 in. 2 
4 

Solving equation (87) to obtain cable breaking strength, we obtain 
P => 250,000 (.71)(.329) •= 58,400 1b 


212 



(TABLE XXXIV 

SUMMAHI OF BEARING LIVES AND LQADS- 
FOUR-POINT HOIST_ 


Special Load 


Brg. Loa 
Cable 
(P ■ 32 ■' 


_location_ 

Input Pinion, Gear End * 

condition_ 

2750 

inrust 

Input Pinion, Outboard End * 


2750 

- 

Input Idler, Outside End * 


2750 

- 

Input Idler, Inside End * 


2750 

- 

Input Gear, Outside End * 


606.8 

- 

Input Gear, Weston Brake End * 


608.8 

- 

Free Reel Clutch Main Timken 


0 

1360 

Free Reel Clutch Piston Isolator** 

Free Reel Piston On 

608.8 

1450 

Free Reel Clutch Washer Preload** 

Free Reel Piston On 

608.8 

1450 

2nd Stage Pinion, Input End (Roller) 


606.8 

0 

2nd Stage Pinion, Outboard End (Roller) 


608.8 

0 

2nd Stage Gear, Input End 


97.1 

0 

2nd Stage Gear, Planetary End 


97.1 

0 

3rd Stage Planetary, Pinion Bearing 


53.2 

0 

4th Stage Planetary, Pinion Roller Brg. 


17.0 

0 

Level Wind Ball Screw Thrust Bearing 

Cable Max. In or Out 

18.7 

3200 

Main Drum Support Bearing (Brg. B Fig, 60) 

Cable In 

5.3 

0 

Secondary Drum Support Brg. (Brg. A Fig.60) 

Cable Out 

5.3 

0 

Note: Any bearings not shown carry no load (or negligible load 

*Static loads not felt from input to Weston brake. 

**Free reel bearings loaded only when free reel piston act: 


A * 



TABUS HOT 

SUMKARX OP BEARING LIVES AND LOADS- 
_FOUR-POINT HOIST_ 



Brg. Load 9 Limit 
Cable Load 

Static Cap. 
1.25 Co 

Brg. Load 9 Normal 
Cable Load 



Special Load 


(3 Co for 

■rcZPfvvSVulK 

Dynamic 

Life 



2750 


- 

- 

0 

495 

1,740 

263 


2750 

- 

- 

- 

0 

165 

1,740 

7,110 


2750 

- 

- 

m 

0 

286 

965 

233 


2750 

- 

- 

- 

0 

286 

965 

233 


606.8 

- 

- 

- 

0 

152 

5,090 

1,030,000 


608.8 

- 

- 

- 

0 

178 

5,280 

714,400 


0 

1360 

0 

25,700 

1360 

0 

- 


Free Reel Piston On 

608.6 

1450 

0 

14,900 

1450 


- 


Free Reel Piston On 

608.8 

1450 

0 

11,400 

1450 

0 

- 



606.8 

0 

2570 

4,150 

0 

920 

5,420 

9,860 


606.6 

0 

2570 

4,150 

0 

920 

5,420 

9,860 


97.1 

0 

3240 

4,780 

0 

1,160 

4,890 

12,860 


97.1 

0 

1900 

2,570 

0 

680 

2,300 

6,640 


53.2 

0 

7940 

8,000 

0 

2,840 

5,520 

1,330 


17.0 

0 

14,260 

17,850 

0 

5,100 

19,100 

43,480 

Cable Max. In or Out 

18.7 

3200 

170 

7,650 

1140 

60 

5,270 

19,290 

Cable In 

5.3 

0 

34,450 

53,400 

0 

12,320 

14,290 

4,860 

Cable Out 

5.3 

0 

17,950 

23,600 

0 

6,420 

16,200 

50,030 


t shown carry no load (or negligible load). 

t felt from input to Weston brake. 

ngs loaded only when free reel piston activated. 


B. 










I 


WEIGHT ANALYSIS 


A weight analysis based on the preliminary design (layout) drawings of 
Appendix III has been made of all the components comprising the 40,OOO- 
pound-capacity external cargo handling system. A detailed weight break¬ 
down for the mechanically driven single-point hoist with a usable cable 
length of 100 feet and the hydraulically powered four-point hoists is 
presented in Table XXXV. For comparison with the weight estimates of 
Phase I, the weight for an 30-foot single-point hoist is included in 
parentheses. 

The calculated weight of the complete single- plus four-point system is 
4974 pounds, including controls wiring and aircraft supporting structure 
peculiar to the hoist system. Of this, approximately 2200 pounds (single¬ 
point hoist and input drive shaft) is readily removable when missions re¬ 
quiring minimum aircraft empty weight are to be undertaken utilizing four- 
point suspension. Similarly, if only the single-point hoist is to be used, 
the four-point hoists c*n be removed, providing a weight reduction of 2236 
pounds. The weight of the cargo handling system chargeable to aircraft 
empty weight is then: 

Single-Point Mission (four-point removed) - 2738 lb 

Four-Point Mission (8lngle-^>oint removed) = 2704 lb 



TABLE XXXV 
WEIGHT SUMMARY- 

AO. OOP-POUND EXTERNAL CARGO HANDLING SYSTEM 

Weight 

(lb) 


Item Component _ Assembly _ System 

Single-Point Hoist System 2406 

(2133)* 


Single-Point Hoist 


2270 

(I960)* 

Drum and Bearings 

353 


Gearing and Housings 

589 


Supports and Bearings 

180 


Level Wind Assembly 
Potentiometer, Cable 

257 


Cutters 

14 


Anti-Backlash Cover 

58 


Lubricating Oil (4 gal) 

28 


Free Reel Unit and Controls 

71 


Cable 

440 


Hook, Swivel, & Slip Ring 

150 


Decoupler (Isolator) 

130 


Drive Train 


120 

Clutch-Reverser 

46 

(173)* 

Upper Angle Gearbox 

21 


Lower Angle Gearbox 

25 


Shafting and Bearings 

28 


Control Unit, Display Wiring, Etc. 


16 

(0)* 

Four-Point Hoist System 


Four-Point Hoist 


559 

Drum and Bearings 

89 

Gearing and Housings 

184 


Level Wind and Supports 
Potentiometers, Potentiom¬ 

48 


eter Clutches, Switches, 
Cable Cutters 

13 


Anti-Backlash Cover 

16 


Lubricating Oil (2 gal) 

14 


Free Reel Unit 

19 


Cable 

76 


Hook, Swivel, & Slip Ring 

52 


Isolator 

38 


Hydraulic Motor 

10 



* 


I 


4 


216 



TABLE XXXV (continued) 


r 




Weight 

(lb) 


Item 

Component 

Assembly 

Hydraulic Subsystem** 


111 

Hydraulic Pump 

20 


Lines, Fittings, Fluid 

90 


Filters 

18 


Flow Divider /alvea 

12 


Relief Valve 

2 


Shutoff Valves 

4 


Free Reel Control 


36 

Display, Control Boxes, & Wiring 


35 

Structure (2 Davits) 


150 


System 


Single- Plus Four-Point Cargo Handling System 4974 

^Weights in parentheses are those estimated in 
Phase I for hoist with 80 feet of cable. 

**Hydraulic pump, filters, relief valve, and a portion 
of the lines and fittings will also be used for 
engine starting system. Weight chargeable to engine starting 
is 35 pounds. 


\ 


217 





MAINTAINABILITY AND RELIABILITY 


INTRODUCTION 

A comprehensive maintainability and reliability study was made of the 
heavy lift cargo handling system. This study was based on the system de¬ 
scription of pages 134 through 156 and the drawings of Appendix III. The * 

reliability and maintainability characteristics indicate that a combined 
system reliability of .969 can be expected, with an estimated .0718 main¬ 
tenance man-hours per flight hour. A failure mode and effect analysis was 
also completed. 

i 

Considerable effort was also expended in a study of the safety aspects of 
the system; primary emphasis was placed on capability of jettisoning a 
load carried on the four-point suspension system. A reliability block dia¬ 
gram of the cable cutter system was prepared. This diagram shows that the 
least redundancy occurs at the explosive charge and cutter and indicates 
that primary emphasis should be placed on adequate testing of these com¬ 
ponents to achieve maximum safety. 


RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS 


The selection of a mechanical drive for the single-point hoist and a hy¬ 
draulic drive for the four-point hoists greatly increases the reliability 
and maintainability of the cargo handling system. Detail design, based on 
field experience with the cargo handling system on the CH-54A,has served 
to maintain these qualities, aB shown in Table XXXVI, page 220. 


FAILURE MODE AND EFFECT ANALYSIS 


The results of a failure mode and effect analysis are sumnarized in Table 
XXXVII, page 222. Failure modes considered were only those that the re¬ 
liability analysis indicated were the most probable. In all cases, the de¬ 
sign is such that these failure modes are minimized, or features are in¬ 
cluded in the basic design of the system, to avoid detrimental effects on 
the mission. 


♦ 

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 


Considerable time has been spent studying the safety aspects of the cargo 
handling systems. The single most critical consideration is the jettison¬ 
ing of a four-point load. Should one of the attachment points fail to be 
released, the results could be catastrophic. Because of this, tandem-dual 
cable cutters at each hoist are used. The wiring is redundant to each 
cable cutter, and further, the redundant wiring is routed through the air¬ 
frame in such a way as to reduce the vulnerability of the cutter charge 
ignition circuit significantly. This redundancy is required to ensure the 
proper level of safety. 


218 


WIRING 



Reliability Block Diagram of Cable Cutter System. 
















TABLE XXXVI 

RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS 



Single - 
Point 

System 

Four- 

Point 

System 

Combined 

System 

Mission Reliability * 

.995 

.986 

.9999** 

System Reliability * 

.985 

.933 

.969*** 

MTBUMA, Hours 

32.5 

7.2 

15.8 

Mean Time to Repair, Hours 

.383 

.364 

.377*** 

Maintenance Burden, MMH/FH 

.039 

.148 

.0718*** 

Inherent Availability, Percent 

99 

96 

97.8**» 

♦Based on a 30-minute mission and two conplete cycles. 

♦♦Assumes complete redundancy of systems, 

♦♦"Based on a 70-30 distribution of single- to four-point missions. 


The ignition circuit is provided with a built-in test circuit which is 
used on the preflight check to ascertain that all circuits are functional. 

Figure 64 is a reliability block diagram of the cable cutter system pro¬ 
vided for each hoist. This diagram shows the redundancy employed in each 
of the systems. Note that the electrical source and the control switch 
are shared for each hoist. 

In this diagram each parallel path provides a successful operation for 
that particular function. The diagram for the successful cutting of all 
the cable in the four-point system would shcrv: four of the diagrams of 
Figure 64 in series. 

From the diagram it can be seen that the least redundancy is at the charge 
and cutter. Therefore it is recommended that adequate testing of these 
components be undertaken to ascertain with a high degree of confidence that 
their reliability is consonant with the overall reliability desired of this 
system. 


INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL 


Singla-fpint Hoist 

Removal is accomplished simply by disconnecting the input shaft, loosening 


220 



6 bolts, and disconnecting the electrical lines at a quick disconnect 
fitting. The hoist is lowered from the aircraft by means of a special 
support equipment bridle and cable attached to the lifting points on the 
hoist support structure. The cable passes through airframe mounted pulleys 
and can be attached to a truck or wheeled vehicle or vehicle winch to 
lower the hoist to the ground. 

Four-point hoist removal is accomplished by loosening 4 bolts and dis¬ 
connecting with hydraulic and electrical quick disconnects. The four- 
point hoists are lowered by means of the same cable bridle system, which 
is supported over a similar pulley arrangement, as that utilized for the 
single-point hoist. 


221 


! ' ■ X JT-ttOtHW VI IjitU trik 



0) 

© 

I 

s 

fa 

I 

© 

Q 

iH 

cd 

•H 

81 

ov 


43 

o 

4) 

fa 

wl 


G 

£ 


rH 

■8 

0) 

o 

© 

rH 

a 

0) 

G 


I 

0) 

G 


© 

fa 

fa 

•a 

i 

a> 

rH © 

■© 3 
3g 
3 y 

T-5 © 

T* iH 

■© a 


& 

© 

36 


G 

© 


I 

© 

+3 43 

' a 
fa 

o o 

CO fa X 


3 

& 


c 

© 

X' 

43 


G 

o 

• ft fa *0 


G 3 

© G 

43 T> 

fa 

o a 

<o © 

G$? 

5A 

H hO 
C 

X fa 

43 © 

3 

g tft 

V 

32 

V © 

CQ O 


c 

•H 


•H 

•g 

2 


c 
60 
fa « 


43 H 
© X 
fa © 

X L 

a O 
O © 
Ci rH 

a a 
&£ 



8P 

•H 

* 

&4 


43 


X 

r -1 


G 


43 

O 


V 


3 

X 


G 

•• 

Q 




43 

B 

X 

© 

£1 

n 

H 

e 

H 

S 3 

•H 

rH 

X 

O 

O 

© 

© 

© 

O 

X 

X 

CO 

O 


,Q 

CJ 

u 

C 

•H 


-P 

CJ 

P 

■s 

o 

o 

© 

8 

a 

:0 


a* 

•H 

■a g 
as 

© g 

£3 

Cl 

O H 
o © 
O 

fa fa 
O G 

4^ 

n o 
« © 
9 H 

r -1 © 


G 

O 

43 

O 

3 

a 

o 

o 

c 

© 

i 

03 


n 


3 


u 

£3 

o o 


G 

o 

"c 

V 


43 

G 
O 

43 

■S 8 
© 

8 -S 

Q X) 


O 

43 


G t* 
O O 


© 43 "O 
GO© 

3 3 -P 

rH fa G 
fa B O 

©ox 
fa o m 


EPi 



fa 

o 

c 

o 

fa 

43 

© 

O 

fa 

as 

•H.g, 

G © 
© H 

a 

o © 

G H 

II 


43 

3 

a 

Is 

o 


G 

© 

a 

o 

G 


G 

© 

43 

I 

•rH 


c 

© 

X 




© 2 


ft fa 

£ 

"*4 

© 

x a 


© 

•H fa 

5 *-i 

0 ) 

• « 

c 

3 

s 

V 

0 


rH 


■0 c 

in 

-O 

c 

« tz 

0 } 

cd 

0 

H fa 

V 

u 

fa 

© © 

0 


43 

« © 

K fa 

Q 

CO -c 

© 

0 

X 


© 

bO 

© 

■3 

5 


« X 

4£ 

X 

g 

G 

0 

a 8 

© 

43 

fa co 

43 

3 

rH W 

0 

H 

CO << 

fa 

O 


222 


Reverser progress to point of actually operati 

losing most of oil 





TABLE rrryii continued 


h&§ 


n 

-*-> 

93 n o 

3 £3 , ft 

!m Cfl U *0 
O *H O C 

.r, *J i 

M Li 03 V 

S <2 *3 ft 3 

A hO 
© © -P <8 
#43 Cfl 

.5 (d O ® JS 


's ft 

y <u c 


jt3 U 

0 4 0 
o 0 J 
o 


> o a ja v ♦» 

•H O £ "H 

311 ll a 


} ** 

h U 

x: © 0 

O #4)fl 
*3 C C 

a © o 3 

<H 0 O 

°io| 

© I C 
<H © , V 
O H <m t* ■ 

■Hi O h *) 

8 «i 

A*J 3 -C V 
4 -P H 
O « O V 
•H V © C 

•p -a .5 © c 

£2 • S 5 

60 P U 43 H 

4 atfilS 


£ *. & 

*3 Jh B 

©faC 
* 4 H 

ft * ? 


I i 


iftft J 

P -h -h n 
o o o ►> 
fc. On SC W 


224 


8ingle-point hoist. 



I 


* 


* 


GROWTH POTENTIAL 


Both the mechanically driven single-point hoist system and the hydrauli¬ 
cally driven four-point hoist system have potential for increased capac¬ 
ity. Growth to 50,000 pounds for these systems can be accomplished in 
incremental stages of modification and payload increase. The following 
paragraphs summarize the stages of improvement or "break-points", the modi¬ 
fications necessary, and the estimated weight increase. 


SINGLE-POINT HOIST SYSTEM 

Design Data : 

Capacity (pounds) 

Ultimate Load Factor 
Usable Cable Length (feet) 
Cable Speed (ft/min) 

Power Requirements (HP) 

Stage 1 Growth 


40,000 

3.75 

100 

60 

94.2 

Capacity « 45,000 lb 


The first "break-point" in the single-point hoist system growth is in the 
ultimate (breaking) strength of 171,600 pounds for the single-point hoist 
cable (see page 187). For an ultimate load factor of 3.75, the maximum per¬ 
missible cable load is 



A 


cable 


171.600 

3.75 


45,800 lb 


The power required at 45,000-lb capacity is 106 HP. At this load and 
power level, the only modifications necessary in the single-point hoist 
system are as follows: 


1. Drum (p. 30) 


Increase thickness from I .44 to 
1.65 inches. 


2. Planet Pinion Bearings 
(p. 188) 


Increase bearing size from 114 
series to 212 series for increased 
static capacity. 


3. Level Wind Ballscrew 
Bearings (p. 189) 


Increase taper roller bearing size 
for increased static capacity. 


The estimated weight increase for the stage 1 growth is 62 pounds. 

Stage 2 Growth Capacity *= 50,000 lb 

To obtain a capacity of 50,000 pounds at the 3.75 load factor, a 1.52- 
inch-diameter 18 x 19 cable is required. Maintaining the same drum diam- 


4 


i, 






225 



ater and width reduces the useful cable length to 90 feet. The power re¬ 
quired is 118 HP. 

The necessary modifications to the hoist are 


1. Cable (p. 187) 

2. Cable Drum (p. 30) 

3. Planet Pinion Bearings 

(p. 188) 

4. Level Kind Balls crew 
and Nut (p. 172) 

5. Level Wind Ballscrew 
Bearings (p. 189) 

The estivated weight increase for the 


New 18 x 19,1.52 inch diameter. 

Increase thickness to 1.85 inches 
and change pitch to 1.625 inches. 

Same as Stage 1 change. 

Change pitch to .541 inch. 

Same as Stage 1 change. 

above modifications is 170 pounds 


* 


FOUR-r PINT HOIST SYSTEM 


Design Data: 


System Capacity (pounds) 

40,000 

Hoist Capacity (pounds) 

11,550 

Ultimate Load Factor 

4.2 

Usable Cable Length (feet) 

50 

Cable Speed (ft/min) 

30 

Power Requirements (HP) 
Hydraulic Requirements 

84.8 

Pressure (psi) 

Flow (fpm/hoist) 

3500 

11.1 


Stage 1 Growth System Capacity 

Hoist Capacity 


48,000 lb 
13,900 lb 


Ae was the case with the single-point hoist system, four-point capacity 
growth is paced by the ultimate (breaking) strength of the cable. The 
♦79-inch cable nas a breaking strength of 58,400 pounds (see page 212), 
giving a dynamic capability of 13,900 pounds. The modifications to the 
system to achieve this capability are 

1. Drum (p. 30) Increase thickness from 0.81 to 

0.97 inch. 

2. 1st Stage Planet Pinion Increase bearing size from 1911 to 

Bearings (p« 213) 110 series for increased static 

capacity. 


k 


226 



» 


f. 


3. 2nd Stage Planet Pinion 
Bearings (p. 213) 


Increase bearing size from 110 to 
208 series for increased static 
capacity. 


4. Planetary Carrier Plate 

(r. 207) 


Increase plate thickness to .31 to 
reduce deflector. 


5. Hydraulic System 


Increase pressure from 3500 to 4000. 


The estimated weight increase for the above modifications is 25 pounds per 
hoist. 


Stage 2 Growth System Capacity = 50,000 lb 

Hoist Capacity * 14,450 lb 

To achieve a four-point hoist system capacity of 50,000 pounds at the 4.2 
load factor, a cable with a breaking strength of 60,700 pounds is required; 
inasmuch as this is such a minor increase over the actual cable strength 
of 58,400 pounds,a small reduction in ultimate load factor is recommended. 
The load factor at 50,000 pounds is 


Ultimate Load Factor * " 4.03 

14,450 


In addition to increasing the hydraulic system pressure to 4000 psi (as is 
required for Stage l), it will also be necessary to increase the hydraulic 
motor displacement by 12 pet by reboring the existing motor. 


227 


• 



• tafrv* 



; SSR^'r*' 


I 


f 


1 


COMPONENT AMD SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT PLAN 


DISCUSSION 


The following paragraphs outline the development effort suggested for the 
heavy lift cargo handling system of this report. For the endurance test 
phase of both the single- and four-point hoists, the construction of a 
special test facility that can be used for both the single- and fo\ir- 
point hoist systems will be required. No attempt has been made to provide 
a schedule for the fabrication of such a facility, although its estimated 
costs are presented on page 230. 

While the plan presented is directed toward the systematic development of 
the full-size aircraft hardware, several areas are suitable and are rec¬ 
ommended for development effort in advance. Among these are the investi¬ 
gation of synchronous operation of ths four-point hoist systam (where the 
hydroelectrical feedback system can be developed in model fora) and the 
reliability of hook release of both the single- and four-point hoists. 


TEST PROGR AM 

The following test programs are recommended to develop and qualify the 
heavy lift external load handling system. 

Mechanically Driven Single-Point Hoist 

All components of drive train and single-point hoist will be utilized in 
all phases of the test program except the static load test. 

1. Static Load Test: 

Conduct a static load test on single-point hoist 
to limit load (100,000 lb) 

2. Endurance Test: 

Conduct a 3600-cycle endurance test at the following 
load spectrum: 


Cycles 

Distance (ft) 

Load (lb) 

Cable Position 

800 

100 

40,000 

vertical 

2400 

100 

30,000 

vertical 

200 

100 

20,000 

vertical 

100 

100 

0 

vertical 

50 

100 

30,000 

15° lateral 


228 



Cycles Distance (ft) Load (lb) Cable Position 
50 100 30,000 15° aft 

3. Environmental Test: 

Conduct an environmental test on the single-point 
hoist and drive train. 

High Temperature Test 
Low Temperature Test 
Sand and Dust Test 
Rain Test 

Note: All tests to be in accordance 
with MIL-E-5272C 

Hydraul ^ ^lly Driven Four-Point Holsts 

1. Static Load Test: 

Conduct a static load test on a four-point 
hoist to limit load (29,000 lb). 

2. Endurance Test: 


Conduct a 3600-cycle endurance test on a four-point 
hoist at the following load spectrum: 


Cycles 

Distance (ft) 

(lb) 

800 

50 

11,550 


13 

11,550 

2400 

50 

8,650 


13 

8,650 

200 

50 

5,800 


13 

5,800 

200 

50 

0 


13 

0 


3* Environmental Test: 

Conduct an environmental test on the four-point hoist, 
control system, hydraulic pump, motor, and lines to 
the following requirements: 

High Temperature Test 
Low Temperature Test 
Sand and Dust Test 
Rain Test 


229 




Note: All teste to be In accordance 
with HIL-E-5272C 

4. System Test: 

Conduct a 200-cycle test to demonstrate synchronous 
operation of the four-point hoist system and the 
adequacy of the hydroelectrical feedback control 
system at varying load conditions. 

Hook Swivel Assemblies 


1. Qualification and Environmental Tests: i 

Conduct a 3600-cycle release test on both the 
single- and four-point hook assemblies. 

Conduct separate environmental tests at the 
conditions outlined for hoists. 

2. Functional Test: 

Conduct a hook functional test in conjunction 
with respective hoist endurance test. 


ESTIMATED DEVELOPMENT COSTS 

Based on preliminary data available at this time, it is anticipated that 
the configuration recoamtended can be developed for the estimated prices 


set forth below: 




Single-Point 

Four-Point 

Engineering Design 

$270,000 

$240,000 

Prototype Hardware 

225,000 

250,000 

Tooling 

100,000 

40,000 

Ground Tests 

50,000 

70,000 


Test Facility (100-ft height) $300,000 


230 



I 


SCHEDULE 


Single-Point Hoist 

Design 

Fabrication 

Development Tests 

Endurance 

Environmental 

Static 


Months 


Four-Point Hoist 
Design 


Fabrication 

Development Tests 

Endurance 

Environmental 

Static 


System Test 

Hook & Snivel Assemblies 
Design 
Fabrication 
Qualification Test 







CONCLUSIONS 


1. A separata function astern that incorporates a mechanically 
driven single-point hoist and four hydraulically driven 
multi-point hoists best meets the external cargo handling 
requirements of a 40,000-pound-pay load, single-rotor heavy 
lift helicopter on the basis of reliability, safety, main¬ 
tainability, redundancy, versatility, and technical confidence, 

2. The single- plus four-point system described above weighs 
4974 pounds. For missions requiring single-point load sus¬ 
pension, the four-point hoists are readily removable, making 
the cargo handling system weight chargeable to aircraft weight 
empty 2738 pounds. Similarly, for four-point missions re¬ 
moval of single-point components results in a cargo system 
weighing 2704 pounds. 

3. The mechanically driven single-point plus the hydraulically 
powered four-point hoist system has a capability of growth 
to 50,000 pounds. All major components of both hoists except 
the cable drum have adequate margins of safety to accommodate 
a 25-pet growth. The single-point system can be up-rated to 
50,000 pounds for 170 additional pounds. The weight increase 
for the four-point system is 100 pounds. 

4. With the use of a hydroelectrical feedback control system, the 
total cable length error (difference between individual cable 
lengths) in 50 feet of travel of the four-point system ie 
7-3/4 inches. This error may be further reduced to 4 inches 
by a one-time calibration procedure, A study should be under¬ 
taken to determine if these limits are within acceptable limits 
for equipment in the U.S. Arny inventory, 

5. The hydroelectrical feedback system proposed for the four- 
point system lends itself to evaluation and development in 
model form. Further effort in this area is re commended. 

6. Thin investigation has led the writers to believe that acquisi¬ 
tion and release of loads carried by four-point suspension will, 
for the most part, be accomplished with aircraft cn the ground 
or from a "wheels light" hover. It is therefore concluded that 
an analysis of mission requirements is in order to determine if 
some other four-point cable length might better meet the heavy 
lift multi-point requirement. The limited investigation per¬ 
mitted within the scope of this contract has led the investi¬ 
gators to believe that a major portion of heavy lift helicopters 
should be equipped with powered four-point hoists with a maximum 
capability not exceeding 20 feet. Further study in this area 
is definitely required. 


232 





4»ir 


7. The use of manually actuated control valves which divert fluid 
from the aircraft utility hydraulic eyetem to provide the power 
to operate the cable free reel clutchee in the e ingle- and the 
four-point hoists meets the requirement for a pilot actuated 
manual load release system. 

8. In-flight release of loads under emergency conditions is more 
safely accomplished in the single-point mode (for an equal 
number of release components) where electrical, free reel, 
auto touchdown, and two explosive release systems are pro¬ 
vided. For the four-point system, only the use of the tan¬ 
dem-dual cable cutters is recommended for in-flight release 
of loads under emergency conditions. The use of the free 
reel system to release loads in the four-point mode would be 
practical if the primary release system failed at the time that 
the aircraft wae hovering just off the ground at the drop 
site, however. 

9. The evaluation of current production cargo hook-swivel 
assenfcliee design indicates that further efforts are required 
to achieve the degree of reliability required* The swivel 
design and method of sealing the slip ring as proposed herein 
should add appreciably to the reliability of theee components. 

A comprehenisve program to study and evaluate the reliability 
of pilot controlled load release would be invaluable to the 
aerial cargo handling system designer. 






BIBLIOGRAPHY 


1. AFBMA Standards. Methods of Evaluating Load Ratings fo r Ball 
Bearings, Section No, 9. The Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers 
Association, Incorporated, New York, New York, Oct. I960. 

2. AFBMA Standards, Methods of Evaluating Load Ratings for Roller « 

Bearings, Section No, 11 , the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers 
Association, Incorporated, New York, New York, July I960. 

3. Burroughs, Lester, R., Power Transmission Studies for Shaft - 

Driven Heavy Lift Helicopters . USAAVLABS Technical Report 65-40. A 

U.S. Army Aviation Materiel Laboratories, Fort Bustis, Virginia, 

Oct. 1965. 

4. Dutton, Walter, J., Paramatr <« Anni vm |b and Pra Ha^n*™ - Dgs^gfl 
of a Shaft Driven Rotor System for a Heavy Lift Helicopter. 

USAAVLABS Technical Report 66-56, U.S. Army Aviation Materiel 
Laboratories, Fort Eustis, Virginia, February 1967, p. 14. 

5. Engineering Information Bulletin No. 500. Raybestos - Manhattan, 

Inc., Stratford, Connecticut, 1954 pp. 28 - 40. 

6. Faupel, J.H., Engineering Design. John Wiley and Sons, Incor¬ 
porated, New Jerk, New York, 1964, pp. 605 - 608. 

7. Harter, Russel W., "New Equations Simplify Design of Mechanical 
Load Brakes”, Product Engineering . Voluas 19, September 13, 1965, 
pp. 140 - 143. 

8. Hope, John, A., "How to Design With Precision Ball Screws”, 

Product Engineering. Volume 9, April 24, 1961, pp. 59 - 64. 

9. MIL-HDBK-5A, M aterials and Elements for Aerospace 

Vehicle Structures. February 8. 1966. 

10. MIL-H-8501A, Helicopter Flying and Ground Handling Qualities : 

General Requirements for . April 3. 1962. p. 3. 

11. Saginaw B »T\ Ber ing Screws and Ball Bearing Splines. Saginaw * 

Steering Gear Div., General Motors Corp., Saginaw, Michigan, 

p. 14. 

12. Shigley, Joseph, E., Machine Design . McGraw-Hill Book Co.,Inc., 

New York, New York, 1956, pp. 447 - 452. * 

13. The Timken E ngineering Journal. Section 1. The Timken Roller 
Bearing Company, Canton, Ohio, 1964. 


234 



14* U.S. Arssy Combat Developments Command, Essential Elements of 
Analysis to Support QMR for a Heavy Lift Helicopter. Study: 

EEA No. 6 Annex A, September, 1965, pp. A-l- A-5. 

15. Wahl, A.M., Mechanical Springs , Second Edition, McGra*41111 Book 
Company, Inc., New York, New York, 1963, pp. 155 - 162. 



APPENDIX I 

SURVEY OF MILITARY VEHICLES 


The 94 vehicles lifted in Table XXXVIII represent the U.S. Army equipment 
considered in the design of the cargo handling system of this study. It 
is based on a survey conducted by the U.S. Arny Combat Developments 
Command (Reference 14)« 

An item number has been assigned to each piece of equipment to provide a 
more convenient form of reference within the report. This procedure was 
necessaxy because the official "line number" of all the equipment was not 
known. 

The equipment is listed in order of increasing weight. To prevent the 
table from becoming unwieldy, a special set of appreviations was devised. 
These abbreviations, listed below, apply only to Table XXXVIII. 


List of Abbreviations 


ABN. 

airborne 

ARB. 

ambulance 

AMMO. 

ammunition 

AMPH. 

amphibious 

ARMD. 

armored 

ASLT. 

assault 

AUX. 

auxiliary 

A VLB. 

assault vehicle launch bridge 

CARR. 

carrier 

C-C 

combat weight 

CGO. 

cargo 

CMD. 

command 

DRVN. 

driven 

DSL. 

diesel 

ENCR. 

engineers 

EftUIP. 

equipment 

EXP. 

experimental 

FT. 

full track 

GAL. 

gallon 

GEN. 

generator 

H 

height, inches 

HON. 

howitzer 

IND. 

industrial 


236 



» 


I 




* 


L 

length, inches 

LT. 

light 

LWB. 

long wheel base (trailer) 

mm 

millimeter 

MED • 

medium 

MTD. 

mounted 

MTZD. 

motorized 

MULT. 

multiple 

OBS. 

observation 

PERS. 

personnel 

PROP. 

propelled 

RD. 

road 

RECONN. 

reconnaissance 

R/M 

reduced height 

RKT. 

rocket 

SP. 

self propelled 

SPD. 

speed 

STLR. 

semi-trailer 

SUP. 

supply 

SVC. 

servicing 

SWB. 

short wheel base 

T 

ton 

TIB. 

trailer 

TRACT. 

tractor 

TRANSP. 

transporter 

TRK. 

truck 

TRKD. 

tracked 

VEH. 

vehicle 

W 

width, inches 

WHID. 

wheeled 

WKR, 

wrecker 

WPH. 

weapons 

WWN. 

with winch 

XIWB. 

extra long wheel base 

ID. 

yard 




337 




Figure 65* Typical Military Vehicle. 


tabiz mrai 



1 

M-100 

TLH. AMPH. COO. 
1/4-T 

0.283 

0.533 

109 

57 

42 


2 

M-14 

CART RKT.TRANSPT. 
318 m 

0.340 

0.340 

221 

58 

31 

58 

3 

H-274 

CARR.LT.WPH. 

l/2-T 

0.398 

0.985 

117 

46 

28 

- 

4 

- 

PROP.,EQUIP. 

AUZ. HCW. 

0.449 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

5 

H-91 

LAUNCHER, MULT. 
RET. 115 an 

0.625 

0.625 

152 

90 

67 

- 

6 

XM-34 

LAUNCHER, RET. 

318 an 

0.659 

1.117 

126 

62 

50 

03 


7 M-101 TIZ.,CG0. 3/4-T 0.670 1.420 147 74 85 53 

6 OH-13 HELICOPTER, OBS. 0.859 1.400 365 90 143 112 


TAELS mm IsanUnuall 





Weight 




Item 

No. 

Model 

No. 

Designation 

Net C-C 

(Tone) 

L 

W H 
(inches) 

R/H 

9 

M-151 

TRK. UTILITY 

1.137 

1.417 

132 

63 

71 

53 

10 

M-332 

TLR., AMMO. 

1.175 

2.225 

153 

86 

56 

- 

11 

T-3 

TRANSPORTER, 
LIQUID 1000 GAL. 

1.200 

4.200 

155 

102 

64 

- 

12 

M-200A1 

CHASSIS TLR. GEN. 
2-1/2-T 

1.205 

4.705 

165 

93 

40 

- 

13 

M-149 

TLR., WATER 
1-1/2-T 

1.300 

3.948 

157 

80 

73 

- 

14 

M-105A2 

TLR., CGO. 

1-1/2-T 

1.325 

2.700 

166 

83 

98 

58 

15 

M-38AIC 

TRK., UTILITY 
1/4-T 

1.333 

1.733 

109 

57 

42 

- 

16 

- 

TLR., BASIC 
UTILITY 2-1/2-T 

1.350 

4.850 

198 

98 

44 

- 

17 

M-170 

TRK., AMB. 1/4-T 

1.482 

1.767 

155 

61 

79 

- 

18 

XM-102 

HON., 105 nan 
TOWED- SP. 

1.530 

1.530 

- 

- 

- 

- 

19 

M-242 

HCW., 105 nan 

TOWS) 

2.490 

6.350 

236 

85 

62 

- 

20 

UH-1B 

HELICOPTER, 

UTILITY 

2.328 

3.600 

461 

103 

157 

90 

21 

UH-1D 

HELICOPTER, 

UTILITY 

2.328 

3.600 

481 

103 

157 

90 

22 

M-37 

TRK., CGO. 3/4-T 

2.850 

3.600 

185 

74 

90 

64 

23 

M-37 

TRK., CGO. 3/4-T 
WWN. 

3.000 

3.725 

190 

74 

90 

64 

24 

M-146 

STLR., VAN SHOP 

3.400 

6.000 

276 

95 

136 

- 

25 

- 

TRK., PORK LIFT 
2-T 

3.400 

3.400 

- 

- 

- 

- 

26 

M-118A1 

STLR., STAKE 6-T 

3.570 

9.570 

276 

95 

104 

38 


239 


TABLE mvin (cQliUnufld) 


Item 

No. 

Model 

Mo. 

Designation 

Weight 

Net C-C 

(Tone) 

T~ 

Dimensions 
W H 
(Inches) 


27 

M-43 

TRK., AMB. 3/4-T 

3.585 

4.275 

206 

75 

92 

- 

28 

M-119A3 

STLR., VAN, 

CGO. 6-T 

3.590 

9.590 

275 

96 

135 

- 

29 

M-405 

HANDLING UNIT, 

762 ran RKT, 

4.315 

4.315 

338 

96 

130 

81 

30 

- 

TLR., LCW BED 

8-T 

4.915 

12.915 

281 

102 

58 

- 

31 

M-9 

BULLDOZER 

5.000 

5.000 

146 

36 

78 

- 

32 

0V-1 

AIRPLANE, OBS. 

5.328 

6.659 

525 

no 

156 

- 

33 

M-273 

TRK., TRACT. 
2-1/2-T SWB. 

5.590 

5.590 

226 

94 

98 

81 

34 

M-345 

TIR., FLAT BH) 

10-T 

5.630 

15.630 

536 

98 

56 

- 

35 

M-48 

TRK., TRACT. 
2-1/2-T IWB.WWN. 

5.921 

5.921 

254 

94 

98 

82 

36 

M-35 

(XM-410E) 

TRK., CGO, 2-1/2 
-T LWB. 

6.233 

11.408 

262 

96 

H2 

86 

37 

M-56 

GUN FT., 90 mm 
ABN. 

6.250 

8.750 

241 

86 

88 

- 

38 

M-114A1 

HCW., 155 ran 

TOWED 

6.350 

6.350 

288 

96 

81 

a» 

39 

M-35 

TRK., CGO 2-1/2- 
T DWB-WWN. 

6.440 

11.790 

276 

96 

112 

86 

40 

M-129 

STLR., VAN SUP. 
12-T 

6.750 

18.750 

345 

96 

140 

- 

a 

M-49C 

TRK., TANK, FUEL 
SVC. 2-1/2-T 

6.978 

6.978 

262 

96 

98 

90 

42 

- 

SCRAPER, TOWED 
7-1/2 ID. 

7.060 

7.060 

- 

- 

- 

- 

43 

M-49C 

TRK., TANK, FUEL 
SVC. 2-1/2-T WWN. 

7.200 

7.200 

277 

99 

130 

- 





TABLE XXXVIII (continued) 


Item 

No. 

Model 

No. 

Designation 

Weight_ 

Net C-C 

(Tone) 

_ D iqengtanp. 

L W H 

(Inches) 

r/h 

44 

- 

LOAD EE, SCOOP TYPE 7.200 
1-1/2 YD3 

7.200 

209 

84 

81 

- 

45 

M-127A1 

STLR., STAKE 12-T 

7.200 

19.400 

345 

97 

109 

58 

46 

M-131A3C 

STLR., TANK, FUEL 
SVC. 

7.400 

7.400 

353 

98 

no 

- 

47 

M-172A1 

STLR. LOW BED 

25-T 

7.430 

32.430 

141 

115 

68 

- 

48 

MT 2D 

GRADER, RD» MTZD • 
DSL. DRVN. 

7.460 

7.460 

264 

81 

85 

- 

49 

M-114A1 

ARMD. RECONN. 
CARRIER -FT. 

7.500 

7.500 

169 

92 

80 

- 

50 

M-313 

STLR. VAN, EXP. 

6-T 

7.500 


323 

98 

134 

- 

51 

M-220 

TRK., VAN SHOP 
2-1/2-T 

7.543 

10.043 

267 

96 

131 

- 

52 

M-342 

TRK., DUMP 2-1/2 
-T 

7.583 

10.083 

273 

96 

101 

83 

53 

M-342 

TRK., DUMP 2-1/2 
-T WWN. 

7.790 

10.290 

273 

96 

100 

100 

54 

M-109 

TRK., VAN, SHOP 
2-1/2-T WWN. 

7.823 

10.291 

277 

99 

130 

- 

55 

• 

TRACTOR, FT., LCW 
SPEED, DSL. DRVN., 
LT. 

7.988 

7.988 

175 

99 

78 

* 

56 

CH-47A 

HELICOPTER, CGO., 
MED • 

8.000 

16.500 

600 

145 

222 

- 

57 

M-129 

STLR., VAN SUP. 
12-T 

8.010 

30.010 

345 

96 

140 

- 

58 

- 

TRACTOR, WHLD. IND 
DSL. DRVN. LT. 

.8.050 

8.050 

194 

96 

90 

- 

59 

- 

TRK., FORK LIFT 

3-T 

8.400 

8.400 


- 

- 

- 


241 








TABLE XXXVIII (continued) 




Weight 


Dimensions 


Item 

No. 

Model 

No. 

Net C-C 

Designation (Tons) 

L 

W H 
(inches) 

“r7h 

60 

M-270A1 

STLR., LOW BED 8.750 

WKR. 12-T 

20.750 

597 

97 

121 

80 

61 

M-52 

TRK., TRACTOR 9.200 

5-T SWB. 

9.200 

258 

97 

107 

87 

62 

M-292 

TRK., VAN EXP. 9.500 

2-1/2-T 

12.000 

329 

97 

139 

- 

63 

M-54 

(XM-656) 

TRK., CGO. 5-T 9.616 

IWB. 

14.616 

299 

97 

116 

86 

64 

M-113 

CARRIER, PERS. FT. 9.878 

11.308 

192 

106 

80 

- 

65 

M-108 

TRK., WKR., CRANE 9.893 
2-1/2-T WWN. 

1C.143 

303 

96 

100 

- 

66 

M-54 

(XM-656) 

TRK., CGO., 5-T 9.973 

LWB, WWN. 

14.973 

314 

97 

116 

86 

67 

M-577 

CARRIER, CMD.POST 10.700 
LT. TRKD. 

11.650 

192 

106 

106 

- 

68 

M-51 

TRK., DUMP 5-T 11.333 

WWN. 

16.333 

282 

98 

111 

88 

69 

XM-106 

MORTAR, SP.,FT. 12.538 
4.2 in. 


192 

106 

80 

mm 

70 

M-60 

TRK., WKR„LT. 11.980 

2-1/2-T 

12.980 

303 

96 

101 

- 

71 

M-78 

HEAT & TIEDOWN 12.Q32 

UNIT 762 mm RKT. 

12.032 

370 

96 

95 

- 

72 

- 

LOADER, SCOOP TYPE 12.200 
DSL. DRVN.1-1/2 

YD3 

12.200 

248 

105 

97 

MB 

73 


GRADER, RD.,MTZD.,12.390 
DSL. DRVN. 

12.390 

311 

96 

111 

93 

74 

M-139 

TRK., STAKE 5-T 13.400 

BRIDGE TRANSP. 

13.400 

369 

114 

114 

- 

75 

M-123C 

TRK., TRACTOR 14.200 

10-T 

14.200 

280 

114 

113 

92 


242 



TABLE XXXVIII (continued) 


1 

I 





Weieht 


Dimensions 



Item 

No. 

Model 

No. 

Designation 

Net C-C 

(Tons) 

L 

V h 

(inches) 

fc/Jl 

I. 


76 

CL-60 

AVIB. 

14.300 

14.300 

338 

158 

73 

- 

V 

p. 

1 

f 

77 


LOADER, SCOOP 
TYPE DSL. DRVN., 
2-1/4 YD3 

14.414 

14.414 

248 

105 

97 


t 

l 

I 

1. 

1 

78 

M-551 

ARMD. RECONN./ 
ABN. ASLT. 
VEHICLE 

15.000 

15.000 

252 

115 

95 

- 

1 

i 


79 

M-115 

HOW. 8-in. 

TCWED 

15.288 

15.288 

432 

112 

108 

- 

l 

f 

1 


80 

— 

TRACTOR, FT. 

DSL. DRVN. LOW 
SPD., MED. 

15.666 

15.666 

196 

116 

88 

- 

\ 

1 

1. 


81 

M-162A1 

STLR. LOW BED 

60-T 

16.348 

76.348 

441 

144 

81 

- 

i 

i 

i 


82 

M-246 

TRK., TRACT. 

XLWB. WWN.5-T 

16.415 

16.415 

352 

98 

132 

89 



$3 

M-62 

TRK., WKR., MED., 
5-T WWN. 

16.700 

16.700 

310 

97 

103 

- 



84 

M-386 

LAUNCHER, 762 mm 
TRK., MTD. 

17.291 

17.291 

389 

114 

105 

- 

i 


85 

M-572 

HANDLING UNIT, 

318 mm TRK. MTD. 

19.850 

19.850 

339 

96 

97 

- 

1 

i 

86 

M-84 

(XM-106) 

MORTAR, SP., FT., 
4.2 in. 

20.561 

20.561 

221 

129 

109 

- 

i 

1 

j 

87 

M-15A2 

STLR. TRX., 
TRANSPORTER 

21.300 

71.300 

462 

146 

105 

- 

* 

f 

i 

• 

88 

(XM-551) 

TANK COMBAT, 

FT. LT. GUN 

76 mm (ARMD. 
RECONN./ABN. 

ASLT. VEH.) 

25.400 

25.900 

280 

126 

122 

108 

!. 


89 

M-44 

(M-109) 

HOW. SP., FT., 

155 nm 

29.000 

29.000 

325 

140 

134 

127 






TABLE XXXVIII (continued) 


Item 

No. 

Model 

No. 

Designation 

Weight 

Net C-C 

(Tons) 

L 

Dimensions 

-R— ~ 

(Inches) 

~r7h 


90 

M-55 

(M-110) 

HCW.GP. FT. 

8 in. 

45.000 

45.000 

325 

140 

146 

117 

1 

91 

M-60 

TANK, COMBAT 

FT. 105 mm 

47.150 

47.150 

366 

143 

126 

- 


92 

M-60 

LAUNCHER, A VIE 

47.650 

47.650 

274 

143 

127 

- 

1 

93 

M-102 

COMBAT, ENGR. 
VSH. 

51.800 

55.000 

337 

148 

122 

- 


94 

M-88 

TANK RECOVERY 

VEH. MED. 

54.000 

56.000 

326 

135 

127 

mm 





* 


244 


APPENDIX II 

MECHANICAL VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE 


INTRODUCTION 

A mechanical variable speed drive concept, designed and developed by the 
Lycoming Division, AVCO Corporation, was investigated as an alternate to 
the clutch-rever3er unit of page 137 as the drive for the mechanically 
powered single-point hoists. 

This concept provides an infinitely variable bidirectional output rotation 
mechanism. The unit proposed for the hoists of this study is a modified 
form of the traction mechanism employed in the constant speed drive units 
for A.C. generating systems used on the Navy A4E. Over 1000 of these 
units have been produced and approximately 500,000 operational hours have 
been accumulated. 


DESCRIPTION 

The proposed actuator combines an epicyclic gear differential coupled to 
an infinitely variable ratio traction transmission. This combination re¬ 
sults in a unit capable of infinitely variable, stepless, bidirectional 
output rotation. 

The variable ratio section consists of two flywheel members, called to¬ 
roids, which are concentric with the drive shaft. Their dished surfaces 
form a toroidal space and contain four rolls, mounted in yokes and fas¬ 
tened to a fixed cage. A precalibrated load bolt squeezes the toroids 
against the rolls and provides the traction for power transmission. Speed 
ratios are changed by varying the angular position of the rolls with re¬ 
spect to the drive axis. The control rod motion can be linearized with 
respect to output speed if desired. The differential section is an epi- 
cyclic gear train and is so designed as to permit equal and opposite out¬ 
put speed. The planet cage rotates as a function of the position of the 
rolls in the ratio change section. 

Table XXXIX gives the applicable design data of the unit. Figure 67, 
page 249 . gives the output power and torque versus rpm relationship. 

It should be noted that added cooling is required for this unit. It will 
be provided by an electric motor driven blower/heat exchanger unit of the 
type used on the CH-3C and CH-53A. This unit will be interlocked so as to 
function only when the variable speed drive unit is in operation. Figure 
66 is included to she* the physical dimensions of the complete unit, less 
heat exchanger. 

It has been estimated that it would require approximately 16 months to 
complete the design, fabrication, and prototype developmental testing 
required prior to delivery. 



TABLE XXXIX 


DESIGN DATA, 

MECHANICAL VARIABIZ SPEED DRIVE 


Input Speed 

7000 rpm 

Output Speed 

Plus or minus 1000 rpm 

Power Capability 

225 HP maximum (lifting load) 

115 HP maximum (lowering load) 

Control Power (max) 

.01 HP at maximum acceleration 
rate of 1300 rpm/sec 

Control Force 

45 lb at control rod for 
maximum acceleration 

Efficiency 

93 pet 

Lubrication 

MIL-S-81087 (Weps) Type 1 

Oil Flow 

20 lb/min 

Cooling Requirements 

500 Btu/min 

Operating Temperature 

-65°F to 350°F 

Weight (Estimated) 


Dry weight with 
integral oil 
reservoir and pump 

107 lb 

Lubricant 

6 lb 


V 


246 


















APPBJDH III 

CARGO RANDLItC STSTB< DRWIHCS 


I 

I 


VIA IN GEARBOX 


PULLEY -HOiST 

removal/ installation 


CABLE - HOIST 
RFV’VAL/ installation 




n 


BEARING SUPPORT 



Figure 68. Single-Point Holst Installation, Single-Rotor H.L.H. 



4 


251 



% 




INCHES 

0 12 3 4 5 

i I I I _I 

S'ALE 


DECOUPLER / ISOLATOR 

M-'ES 

0 5 10 

SCALE 


•—- C.OU°LMG (TrPiCAL) 


BEAP-NG SUPPORT 
VISCOUS DAMPED 




CiuICH PEVFRSEP UNi I 
LiPPER ANGLE BOX 


•OPJVE SHAFTING I 


B 





CLUTCH REVERSER UNIT 



BEAP'KiG SUPPORT 
VISCOUS DAMPED 



✓ 



SCALE 


DECOUPLER / ISOLATOR 




10 


.E 


INCHES 

0 12 3 4 5 

U- J i I_I_I_I 

S'ACE 









253 




HOIST REMOVAL PULLEY 



FOUR POINT HOIST 



return to ^ 

UTILITY HYDRA' 
SYSTEM 



f 


& 


EMOVAL PULLEY 


FOUR POINT HOIST 


V 


PUSH-PULL CABLE 
TO AFT FACING 
PILOT 


V. 


I si 


RETURN TO /yt ■ — ^ 
UTILITY HYDRAULIC 
SYSTEM 


i 

5 p 

‘Ls 


FROM A/C UTILITY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 

—FREE REEL MODE SELECTOR VALVE 

- - 10 SINGLE POINT HOIST 
MANUAL CONTROL VALVE 


MANUAL CONTROL VALVE 


TO FREE REEL CLUTCH 



INCHES 
0 50 100 

lihlllihl 

SCALE 





CLUTCH-REVERSER UNIT 


INCHES 
0 5 10 

Liiiihl n 111 

SCALE 


Figuro 70. Singlo- Plus Four-Point 




- HOIST INPUT DRIVESHAFT 


Installation, Tsnrti-ftotor H.L.H 














INTERCONNECTING 

SHAFTING 


FOUR-POINT HOIST 





HOIST SUPPORT 


SINGLE-POINT HOIST 



SINGLE--POINT HOIST 















—TO MODE SELECTOR 
VALVE 


'H r"7 

PUSH-PULL CABLE 
TO AFT FACING 
I I / PILOT 

• I / I 



PILOT M -MANUAL CONTROL 

I I / R/ VALVE 

-CJ t CJ 1 

l , \ I! 

k \\^y / / TO FREE REEL-l—RETURN TO A/t 

\ \ CLUTCH UTILITY HYDRAULIC 

\\ \ / A \ SYSTEM 







i 

*4 

* 


l 


K 




REACTION PIPE — 
BALL SCREW 


WEAR LINER- 


_LI 




INPUT SHAFT 


DECOUPLER 
REACTION ARM 


FREE REEL — 
CLUTCH ASSY 


WESTON BRAKE 

CABLE 


- DUAL - TANDEM 
CABLE CUTTERS 


BELLMOUTH ASSY 


BALL SCREW 

REAL I ION Pll 


Figure 71* Single-Feint Holst. 


—TO MODE SELECTOR 
VALVE 



SECTION A-A 






ANTI - BACKLASH COVFR 


' —CABLE LENGTH POTENTIOMETER 
-SLIP RING ASSY 







259 









■COOLING OIL 
FITTING (TYP) 

/—HIGH PRESSURE 
OIL FITTINGS (TYP) 


CLUTCH Nal 


UPPER 

ANGLE GEARBOX 


COUPLING 


OUTPUT-TO 
SINGLE - POINT 
HOIST 


DRIVE SHAFT 


SECTION A-A 


OUTPUT-TO 
LOWER ANGLE 
GEARBOX 




*9»*J^*W*'W <*• 


-COaiNG OIL 
FITTING (TYP) 


-HIGH PRESSURE 
OIL FITTINGS (TY$ 


INPUT - FROM- 
UPPER ANGLE 
GEARBOX 



OUTPUT-TO 
LOWER ANGLE 
GEARBOX 


SCALE 




' i> ii t ii 111' 


-Mi) - — 



LiLL 1 ION L C 


Fliuri 73, FaurW’ilnt Holvt* 

261 


I T » 





ANTI-BACKLASH COVER 


CABLE LENGTH 
POTENTIOMETER I 

FEEDBACK —. ]-J 

CONTROL 


I SLIP RING - 
ASSY 


l^vLT SCRUB - 

JBk R0 ^er 


-M—Jl ^ 

\ 


rr 

5_ 

i 

x, 


3 



QETAILA 

W/O FREE REEL CLUTCH 


\ ^— DETAIL A 


ROLLER BELLMOUTH 
ASSY 


, CABLE 
DRUM 


]>— FREE REEL 
7 CLUTCH 


FROM FOUR- g 
POINT HOIST 
MANUAL CON- ^ 
TROL VALVE 


WESTON BRAKE 


L - BALL SCREW 
- REACTION PIPE 



10 FREE REEL CLUTCH 



DETAIL A 



FREE REEL 
CLUTCH 


FROM FOUR 
POINT HOIST 
MANUAL CON¬ 
TROL VALVE 


<3 

<3 


WESTON BRAKE 









WIPER-SCRAPER 

SEALS 



xloJ_I_I 

SCAlI 


Figure 74. Cargo Hook, 12,OOO-Pound Capacity 











HOIST CABLE 



r 



11,550-LB-CAPACITY 
HOOK-SWIVEL ASSY 

SIZE COMPARISON 





40,000-LB-CAPACITY 
HOOK-SWIVEL ASSY 


INCHES 
0 12 345 











/-HOUSING 
/-TAPERED PIN 

/-UPPER PISTON 


I OWER PISTON 


r~ LOAD CELL 


INCHES 








APPENDIX IV 

TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 


INTRODUCTION 

To provide a better understanding of the operation of the proposed single- 
and four-point cargo handling systems, typical missions involving both 
systems are described below. Two missions are described for the four- 
point system. The second mission is included to show methods that can be 
used to assure safe operation under adverse loading conditions. 

No in-flight emergencies are described. Standard procedures for in-flight 
emergencies for the single-point mission, in all cases, should be the 
Jettisoning of the load by the hook release method. If a malfunction did 
not permit the hook to release the load, the cable would then be sheared 
by the tandem-dual cutters or would be free reeled off the drum. In a 
multi-point mission no hook release would be attempted. Instead, the 
cables would be sheared by using the tandem-dual cable cutters. 

Prior to all missions the cargo handling system should be checked out by 
the crew chief, with the APP providing the power, before the pilots enter 
the aircraft. 


SINGLE-POINT MISSION 


Mission : Fly to pickup area for bulldozer which is to be transported 

to clear area for observation post. 

Terrain : Bulldozer in level field but 70-foot trees surround drop 

area on mountain top. 

Load : Prerigged in a sling with sling legs attached to a nylon 

ring at apex. 

Sequence : 

1. Aircraft flown to pickup area, hover over bulldozer. 

2. Reel out cable, ground crew slides nylon ring on 
load beam of hook. 

3. Load is lifted off the ground by the aircraft.. 

4. Pilot checks aircraft controllability. If satisfactory, 
he signals aft pilot (hoist operator) to reel in on 
single-point hoist to cable length required for best 
flying qualities. 

5. Aircraft is flown to drop site and hovers above trees. 

6. Hoist is reeled out and hook is placed in auto touch¬ 
down mode. 

7. When load is placed on the ground and the cable tension 
drops to 150 pounds, the hook opens, releasing the load. 


267 



8. Hook control is placed in safe ar.d hoist cable is 
reeled in. 

9. Aircraft departs drop site when hook is reeled in 
sufficient distance to assure clearance with tail rotor. 

10. Aircraft returns to base. 

Note: In the event of a malfunction of the automatic 
touchdown release, the electrical release would 
be used. 


FOUR-POINT MISSION - STANDARD LOAD 

Mission : Fly to pickup area for self-propelled mortar which is ^ 

to be transported to forward area. 

Terrain : Vehicle located in level field, to be put down on 

relatively rough terrain. 

Load : Rigged for four-point pickup; no single-point sling 

available. 

Sequence : 

1. Aircraft flown to pickuo area and landed near vehicle. 

2. Vehicle driven under aircraft; hookup is made by 
ground crew. 

3. Hoists reeled in until load is a foot off the ground. 

A. Cable load indicators are checked to ensure that load 

falls within the C.G. limits of the aircraft. 

5. Aircraft is lifted off into a hover; flight controls 
checked out as satisfactory. 

6. Aircraft flies to drop site, which is found to be too 
uneven to permit landing. 

7. A low altitude hover is established. 

8. Hoists are reeled out until vehicle is several feet 
below the wheels of the aircraft. 

9. Hover altitude is slowly reduced until load is on 
the ground and all four cables are slack. 

10. Electrical hook release is actuated and all four hooks 
open. 

11. Aft pilot (hoist operator) confirms that all hooks have 
released and aircraft hovering altitude iB slowly in¬ 
creased until it is confirmed that all hooks are free. 

12. Hoists are reeled in until a safe length is reached. 

13. Aircraft returns to base. \ 

Notes: (1) Step 10 requires the use of electrical release of the 
hooks. If the auto touchdown release were provided 
and were to be used under these conditions, the load 
release could result in adverse loads being felt by 
the aircraft* 


268 



These loads would result if one side of 
the vehicle touched the ground first. 

This would cause the hooks on this side 
to open, and the resultant loss in load 
on the aircraft would cause it to roll 
about the hooks that had not released. 

For this reason, the automatic touchdown 
release is not provided for the four- 
point hoist hooks. 

(2) If one or more hooks fail to open, a ground 
crewman must be available to climb up on 
load and manually release the hooks. If 
no crewman is available, or hook(s) cannot 
be opened, the hoist cable(s) can be free 
reeled off the drum(s) or sheared with the 
tandem-dual cable cutter(s). 


FOUR-POINT MISSION - NONSTANDARD LOAD 


f 

1 


Mission ? Fly to pickup area for bulldozer which is to be transported 

to forward area. 

Terrain : Vehicle located on rough terrain, to be put down on a road 

in forward area. 

Load ; Rigged for four-point pickup, but pickup points not symmetri¬ 
cally located about C.G. of vehicle. 

Sequence : 

1. Aircraft flown to pickup area. 

2. Rough terrain and unknown condition of pickup points, 

or reasonable suspicion of same, results in a 15- to 20- 
foot hover being established over vehicle. 

3. Hoists reeled out until hooks are on the ground and the 
cables are slack. 

A. Hookup is made by ground crew. 

5. Vehicle is slowly lifted off the ground by the aircraft; 
hoists are not reeled in. 

6. Vehicle swings forward, as vehicle C.G. is too far for¬ 
ward relative to the pickup points. 

7. Pilot corrects for load swing with azimuth control 
(cyclic control stick) but feels that too much forward 
stick is required to permit forward flight. 

8. Pilot requests aft pilot (hoist operator) to trim load 
by reeling in on aft hoists. 

9. Aft hoists are reeled in but vehicle assumes an extreme 
noae-down attitude (or maximum cable load is reached 
and hoists stall). 


269 



10 . 

11 . 


12 . 

13. 

14. 

15. 

16 . 


Hoist operator informs pilot that he has run out of 
trim control with the hoists. 

Pilot rechecks cyclic control and decides that not 
enough improvement has been made to warrant an attempt 

at forward flight. , .. , 

Pilot informs hoist operator that it is a no go and 

asks that load be leveled up. 

Vehicle is leveled up by lowering aft hoist cables. 
Hover altitude is slowly reduced until load is on 
ground and all four cables are slack. 

Electrical release is actuated and all four hooks open. 
If tine permits, the pickup points on the vehicle are 
repositioned and another attempt is made or a sling is 
rigged to permit single-point lifting. A single-point 
sling, with adjustable length legs, could be quickly 
set to compensate for the nonsymmetrical C.b. ol tne 
load so that it could be carried level. 


« 


< 


270 



DISTRIBUTION 


US Army Materiel Command 
US Army Aviation Materiel Command 
Chief of R&D - DA 

Director of Defense Research and Engineering 
US Army R&D Group (Europe) 

US Army Aviation Materiel Laboratories 
US Army Human Engineering Laboratories 
US Army Ballistic Research Laboratories 
US Army Research Office - Durham 
US Army Test and Evaluation Command 
US Army Electronics Command 

US Army Combat Developments Command, Fort Belvoir 

US Army Combat Developments Command Transportation Agency 

US Army Command and General Staff College 

US Army Aviation School 

US Army Armor and Engineer Board 

Air Force Flight Test Center, Edwards AFB 

US Army Field Office, AFSC, Andrews AFB 

Air Force Materials Laboratory, Wright-Patterson AFB 

Systems Engineering Group, Wright-Patterson AFB 

Naval Air Systems Command, DN 

Office of Naval Research 

US Naval Research Laboratory 

Marine Corps Liaison Officer, US Army Transportation School 
Testing and Development Division, US Coast Guard 
NASA Scientific and Technical Information Facility 
NAFEC Library (FAA) 

US Army Aviation Human Research Unit 
US Army Board for Aviation Accident Research 
US Naval Aviation Safety Center, Norfolk 
Federal Aviation Agency, Washington, D.C. 

US Army Medical R&D Command 
US Government Printing Office 
Defense Documentation Center 



U nclassified _ 

Security Classification 



This report presents the results of s two-phase feasibility and preliminary design 
study of load suspension configurations capable of meeting the external cargo 
handling system requirements of a 40,000-pound-payload heavy lift helicopter 


In Phase 1, Design Analysis, both separate function configurations (those that 
incorporate individual single- and multi-point hoists) and combined function configu¬ 
rations (multi-point hoists used to perform both single- and multi-point missions) 
have been Investigated for both single- plus two-point and single- plus four-point 
load suspensions. This phase was primarily concerned with investigation of hoist 
types; methods of power transmission to the hoists; and selection of mechanical, 
hydraulic, and electrical components. A comparative evaluation of 15 system arrange¬ 
ments was made on th? basis of weight, power, reliability, in-flight safety, versatil¬ 
ity, and productivity. 

The single- plus four-point system was determined to meet the requirements best and 
was recommended for the Phase IJ, Preliminary Design. This phase Included the 
preparation of layout drawings, load and stress analysis of major components, a 
maintainability and reliability analysis, and the preparation of a component develop¬ 
ment plan. The single- plus four-point system weighs 4974 pounds for a hoist capacity 
of 40,000 pounds. The system has been designed such that the hoists of both systems 
are readily removable for missiors ’•equiring minimum empty weight. For single-point 
operation (four-point hoists removed), the system weighs 2758 pounds; for four-point 



















1 4. 


KIV NONOB 


Helicopter - Heavy Lift 
Cargo Handling System - Helicopter 
External Load Handling System - Helicopter 
Hoist - Helicopter 










none* or chakks in classification, 

D IS T RI B U T I ON AND AVAILAHLUT 

69-16 15 snrmBKR 1969 


AD -828 ?di 

Iio Foreign without 

No limitation 

United Aircraft Coi p., 

approval of Army 


Stratford, Conn. 

Aviation Materiel 


Sikorsky Aircraft 

Labs., Fort Eustis, 


Div. 

Final rept. 

Kept. no. SER-50M1, 
USAAVLABS-TR-67-^6 

Nov 67 

Va. 


Contract DA-Mi- 177- 
AMC-fc67(T) 

* 



USAAML notice, 

1U Jul 69